Integra Stereo Receiver DTR 74 User Manual

AV Receiver  
DTR-7.4  
Instruction Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.  
Please read this manual thoroughly before making connections and plugging in the unit.  
Following the instructions in this manual will enable you to obtain optimum performance  
and listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.  
Please retain this manual for future reference.  
Precautions  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
1. Recording Copyright  
Unless its for personal use only, recording copyrighted  
material is illegal without permission of the copyright  
holder.  
For Canadian Models  
2. AC Fuse  
NOTE:  
The AC fuse inside the DTR-7.4 is not user-serviceable. If  
you cannot turn on the DTR-7.4, contact your Integra/  
Onkyo dealer.  
THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH  
CANADIAN ICES-003.  
3. Care  
RSS 210, Low Power Licence-Exempt Radiocommunications  
Devices (All FrequencyBands).  
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:  
Occasionally you should dust the DTR-7.4 all over with a  
soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft cloth dampened  
with a weak solution of mild detergent and water. Dry the  
DTR-7.4 immediately afterwards with a clean cloth. Dont  
use abrasive cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical  
solvents, because they may damage the nish or remove  
the panel lettering.  
CAUTION:  
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE  
OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.  
4. Power  
WARNING  
Modèle Canadien  
REMARQUE:  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST  
TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULLY.  
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. Make sure  
that the voltage in your area meets the voltage requirements  
printed on the DTR-7.4s rear panel (e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or  
AC 120 V, 60 Hz).  
CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE LA CLASSE B EST  
CONFORME À LA NORME NMB-003 DU CANADA.  
CNR-210, Dispositifs de radiocommunications de faible  
puissance, exempts de licence (pour toutes les bandes de  
fréquences).  
Sur les modèles dont la che est polarisée:  
Setting the [Standby/On] switch to Standby does not fully  
shutdown the DTR-7.4. If you do not intend to use the  
DTR-7.4 for an extended period, remove the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
ATTENTION:  
POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE  
LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA  
BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER  
JUSQUAU FOND.  
For U.S. Models  
Note to CATV system installer:  
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installers  
attention to Section 820-40 of the NEC which provides guide-  
lines for proper grounding and, in particular, species that the  
cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the  
building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.  
FCC Information for User  
CAUTION:  
The user changes or modications not expressly approved by  
the party responsible for compliance could void the users  
authority to operate the equipment.  
NOTE:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits  
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio fre-  
quency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with  
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio com-  
munications. However, there is no guarantee that interference  
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment  
does cause harmful interference to radio or television recep-  
tion, which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Before Using  
Setting UpYour DTR-7.4  
Important Safety Instructions ..........................2  
Precautions........................................................3  
Table of Contents..............................................4  
Features .............................................................6  
Supplied Accessories.......................................6  
Before Using the DTR-7.4.................................7  
Installing the Batteries .....................................7  
Using the Remote Controller ...........................7  
Setup Menu ..................................................... 28  
Navigating Through the Setup Menu ............ 29  
Selecting the Appropriate Setting for Your  
Connections ................................................ 30  
Hardware Setup............................................ 30  
Speaker Impedance Sub-menu.................. 30  
Surr Back/Zone 2 Sub-menu...................... 31  
Remote Setup Sub-menu........................... 31  
Changing the Remote Controller’s Control  
ID ............................................................. 32  
TV Format Sub-menu................................. 32  
Speaker Setup .............................................. 32  
Speaker Config Sub-menu......................... 33  
Speaker Distance Sub-menu ..................... 33  
Level Calibration Sub-menu....................... 34  
Configuring Input Settings Suitable for  
Your Connections....................................... 35  
To Change the Display of the Input Source  
from TAPE to MD ....................................... 35  
Input Setup.................................................... 36  
Digital Setup Sub-menu ............................. 36  
Multichannel Setup Sub-menu ................... 38  
Video Setup Sub-menu .............................. 38  
Facilities and Connections  
Index Parts and Facilities .................................8  
Front Panels ....................................................8  
Front Panel Display .......................................10  
Rear Panel.....................................................10  
Remote Controller...........................................12  
Amp Mode .....................................................12  
Connecting Antenna .......................................14  
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna...............14  
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna.................14  
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna.............15  
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna.............15  
About Home Theater.......................................16  
Enjoying Home Theater.................................16  
Speaker Placement .........................................17  
Connecting Speakers......................................18  
Using the Speaker Cable Labels...................18  
AV Cables and Connectors ............................19  
Connecting to Audio/Video Equipment.........20  
Connecting a Television Monitor or Projector  
(MONITOR OUT) ........................................20  
Connecting a DVD Player (DVD)...................21  
Connecting a Video Cassette Recorder  
(VIDEO 1)....................................................21  
Connecting a DVD Recorder or Other Digital  
Video Recording Device (VIDEO 2)............22  
Connecting a Satellite Tuner, Television, or  
Settop Box (VIDEO 3 or 4)..........................22  
Connecting Video Camera, etc.  
(Video 5 Input) ............................................23  
Connecting a Compact Disc Player (CD) ......23  
Connecting a Turntable (PHONO).................23  
Connecting a Cassette Tape Deck, MD Recorder,  
DAT Deck, or CD Recorder (TAPE)............24  
Connecting the Power Cords from Other  
Also refer to the sections below when you  
want to make advance settings to suit your  
preferences.  
Useful Settings (Basic)  
Input Setup (Basic)......................................... 52  
Labelling the Input Source (Character Input)  
................................................................... 52  
Adjusting the Volume Differences Between  
Components (IntelliVolume)....................... 53  
Audio Adjust (Basic) ...................................... 54  
Adjusting the Bass and Treble Sound  
(Tone Control) ............................................ 54  
Selecting Surround Speakers to Output the  
Sound (Surround Speakers)....................... 54  
Setting the Various Sound Effects  
(Sound Effect) ............................................ 55  
Useful Settings (Advanced)  
Devices .......................................................24  
Connecting Auxiliary Power Amplifier............25  
Input Setup (Advanced) ................................. 56  
Configuring the Listening Modes You Use  
Frequently (Listening Mode Preset) ........... 56  
Audio Adjust (Advanced)............................... 57  
Adjusting the Audio Delay (Delay Sub-menu)..... 57  
Setting the Low Frequency Effect Levels  
(LFE Level)................................................. 58  
Detailed Settings for Each Listening Mode .... 58  
Preference (Advanced)................................... 62  
Volume Setup Sub-menu.............................. 62  
Adjusting the Headphone Volume Level  
Connecting  
.......................................................................26  
Connections for Remote Control ( ) ..........26  
-compatible AV Components  
Connecting the Power ....................................27  
Connecting the Supplied Power Cord ...........27  
Turning on the Power ....................................27  
Turning on the Power from the Remote  
Conroller......................................................27  
(Headphones Level)................................... 63  
Setting the Background Color for OSD  
(OSD Setup)............................................... 63  
Switching the OSD Position (OSD Position).... 63  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents—Continued  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts ......................48  
Tuning Into a Radio Station...........................48  
Presetting a Radio Station.............................49  
Recording a Source ........................................50  
To Record the Input Source Signal You are  
Currently Watching/Listening......................50  
To Record an Input Source Signal Different  
from that You are Currently Watching/  
Enjoying Music and Movies  
Enjoying Music or Videos with the DTR-7.4....40  
Basic Operation.............................................40  
Temporarily turning off the sound...............40  
Listening with headphones.........................40  
Temporarily Changing the Speaker Output  
Levels.......................................................41  
Using the Sleep Timer  
(remote controller only) ............................41  
Adjusting the brightness of the front display...41  
Switching the display..................................42  
Changing the audio mode ..........................43  
Adjusting the bass and treble .....................43  
Using the Listening Modes ............................44  
Listening Modes............................................44  
Selecting the Listening Mode........................46  
Listening......................................................50  
Recording the Video from One Source and the  
Audio from Another.....................................51  
Remote Controller  
Operating Onkyo Products Using the  
Remote Controller .......................................84  
Operating Onkyo Products Using the  
Connection..................................................84  
DVD Mode.....................................................84  
CD Mode .......................................................86  
MiniDisc Mode...............................................87  
Tape Mode ....................................................88  
Using the Remote Controller with Other  
Components.................................................89  
Entering a Remote Control Code ..................89  
Learning Commands from Another Remote  
Controller ....................................................94  
Using Macros.................................................95  
Editing Remote Controller Modes..................96  
Resetting the Remote Controller ...................98  
According to your connected devices or  
environments, you can enjoy more of audio  
and video with DTR-7.4’s advanced  
functions.  
Making Full Use ofYour DTR-7.4  
Enjoying Analog Multichannel Audio Playback  
......................................................................64  
Connecting to Devices with Analog  
Multichannel Output....................................64  
Setup for Multichannel Output.......................64  
Playing Analog Multichannel Audio...............65  
Enjoying Music in the Remote Zone .............66  
Connecting Zone 2........................................66  
Performing the Settings for the Remote Zone  
(Zone 2)......................................................67  
Enjoying Music in the Remote Zone .............68  
Operating Components not Reached by the  
Remote Controller Signals (IR IN/OUT).....69  
If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach  
the DTR-7.4 Remote Sensor......................69  
If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach  
Other Components .....................................69  
Using the Remote Controller with Radio  
Frequency....................................................70  
Changing the Remote Controller’s  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting Guide...................................99  
POWER.........................................................99  
SPEAKERS ...................................................99  
FM/AM TUNER..............................................99  
VIDEO and AUDIO......................................100  
NET AUDIO.................................................100  
REMOTE CONTROLLER............................101  
OTHER........................................................101  
If One of the Messages Shown Below  
Transmission Signal Format (IR/RF)..........70  
Using an External Device with 12V Trigger  
Terminal .......................................................71  
Connecting to an External Device with 12V  
TRIGGER Terminal ....................................71  
Configuring the 12V Trigger Terminal...........71  
Enjoying Net Audio.........................................72  
Features........................................................72  
System Requirements...................................72  
Connecting the DTR-7.4 to Your Ethernet  
Network ......................................................73  
Using the Remote Controller.........................74  
Network Setup Menu.....................................76  
Input Setup Menu..........................................78  
Enjoying Internet Radio.................................80  
Playing a Music File Saved on the Network  
Audio Server...............................................82  
Appears.....................................................102  
Specifications................................................103  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Amplifier Features  
Other Performance Features  
I 100 Watts per channel min. RMS. into 8 2  
channel driven, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz with no  
more than 0.08% total harmonic distortion (FTC)  
I 7 Channel Amplifier  
I Wide Range Amplifier Technology (WRAT)  
I Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry  
I 192 kHz/24 Bit D/A Converters (except for  
Surround Back L/R)  
I VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry) for  
L/C/R channels  
I IntelliVolume  
I IR In/Out Bi-Directional RS-232 Port  
I Character Input  
I Net-Tune Function with MP3/WAVE (PCM)/  
WMA Decoding  
I Ethernet Cable Plug-in Capability  
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol  
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
I Powered Zone 2 and 12V Trigger  
Audio/Video Features  
“DTS,” “DTS 96/24,” “DTS-ES” and “Neo:6” are trademarks of  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
®
®
I THX Surround EX  
THX is a trademark or registered trademark of THX Ltd.  
Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX Ltd.  
“Theater-Dimensional” and “Net-Tune” are trademarks of  
Onkyo Corporation.  
I THX Select Certified  
®
I Dolby * Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic II  
I DTS, DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix,  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trandemarks, or reg-  
istered trademarks of Microsoft  
DTS Neo:6, and DTS 96/24  
TM  
I Theater-Dimensional Virtual Surround Mode  
Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
I Non-Scaling Configuration  
I Onscreen Displays (Basic Menu/Advanced Menu)  
I 2 Wideband Component-Video Inputs/1 Output  
I Composite and S-Video to Component Video  
Upconversion  
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.  
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from  
Fraunhofer IIS and THOMSON multimedia.  
“XiVA” is a registered trademark of Imerge Limited.  
Xantech is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.  
Niles is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.  
I Composite to S-Video Conversion  
I 6 S-Video Inputs/3 Outputs  
I 6 Assignable Digital Inputs (3 optical/3 Coaxial), 2  
output, and 1 Digital Input (optical on the front panel)  
I Pre Out Terminals for Front L/R, Center,  
Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R or Zone 2 L/R  
and Subwoofer  
THX Select  
Before any home theater component can be THX Select certified, it  
must pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only  
then can a product feature the THX Select logo, which is your guar-  
antee that the Home Theater products you purchase will give you  
superb performance for many years to come. THX Select require-  
ments define hundreds of parameters, including power amplifier  
performance, and pre-amplifier performance and operation for both  
digital and analog domains. THX Select receivers also feature pro-  
prietary THX technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which accurately  
translate film soundtracks for home theater playback.  
FM/AM Tuner Features  
I 40 FM/AM Random Presets  
I FM Auto Tuning  
Supplied Accessories  
Make sure you have the following accessories:  
The power  
cord may dif-  
fer depend-  
ing on the  
region.  
Indoor FM antenna  
(connector type varies  
from country to country  
75/300 ohm antenna  
adapter  
AM loop antenna  
Power cord  
(Australian model only)  
Protective caps for the  
Video 5 jacks on the front of  
the DTR-7.4. Be sure to  
always attach the protective  
caps when you are not con-  
necting a device to the  
Video 5 jacks.  
1
2
3
Protective caps  
For digital jack × 1  
For analog jack × 1  
Speaker Cable  
Remote controller &  
Speaker cable labels  
three batteries (AA/R6)  
*In catalogs and on packaging, the letter added to the end of the product name indicates the color of the DTR-7.4. Specifications and operation are the  
same regardless of color.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Using the DTR-7.4  
Installing the Batteries  
Using the Remote Controller  
To use the remote controller, point it at the DTR-7.4’s  
remote control sensor, as shown below. The DTR-7.4’s  
Standby indicator flashes while a signal is being  
received from the remote controller.  
To open the battery compartment, press  
the small hollow and slide off the cover.  
1
Remote control sensor  
DTR-7.4  
Standby indicator  
Insert the two supplied batteries (AA/R6)  
in accordance with the polarity diagram  
inside the battery compartment.  
2
30˚  
30˚  
Notes:  
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the  
DTR-7.4 is subjected to bright light, such as direct  
sunlight or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this  
in mind when installing the DTR-7.4.  
Put the cover onto the remote controller  
and slide it shut.  
3
• If another remote controller of the same type is used  
in the same room, or the DTR-7.4 is installed close to  
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote control-  
ler may not work reliably.  
• Don’t put anything, such as a book, on the remote  
controller, because the buttons may be pressed inad-  
vertently, thereby draining the batteries.  
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the  
DTR-7.4 is installed in a rack behind colored glass  
doors. Keep this in mind when installing the  
DTR-7.4.  
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an  
obstacle between it and the DTR-7.4’s remote control  
sensor.  
Notes:  
• The supplied batteries should last for about six  
months, although this will vary with usage.  
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try  
replacing both batteries.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries, or different types of  
batteries.  
You can set the transmission signal format to infrared  
(IR), or radio frequency (RF) for use with the  
optional RF Receiver. This is useful when, for exam-  
ple, the DTR-7.4 is installed in a rack or is not in line  
of sight of the remote controller.  
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a  
long time, remove the batteries to prevent possible  
leakage and corrosion.  
• Dead batteries should be removed as soon as possible  
to prevent possible leakage and corrosion.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index Parts and Facilities  
Here is an explanation of the controls and displays on the front panel of the DTR-7.4.  
The specifications for your model may differ due to regional requirements.  
Front Panels  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
Standby  
Return  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
-
A
FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
Phones  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
( )  
Rec RED  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
-
DTR 7.4  
Protective caps  
Protective caps are provided for the Video 5 jacks. Be  
sure to always attach the protective caps when you are  
not connecting a device to the Video 5 jacks.  
Video  
5
Input  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
-
DTR 7.4  
Protective caps  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index Parts and Facilities—Continued  
For further operational instructions, see the pages indi-  
cated in brackets [ ].  
Preset  
/
buttons [49]  
These buttons are used to select radio presets and to  
select items on the onscreen setup menus (OSD).  
1Standby/On button [27]  
This button is used to set the DTR-7.4 to On or  
Standby. In the standby state, the display is turned off  
and the DTR-7.4 cannot be operated.  
FRec Out button [50, 51]  
This button is used to select the input source that  
you want to record via the REC OUTs (i.e., TAPE  
OUT, VIDEO 1 OUT, VIEDO 2 OUT).  
Zone 2 button [68]  
2Standby indicator [7, 27]  
Lights when the DTR-7.4 is in the standby state and  
when a signal is received from the remote control-  
ler.  
This button is used to select the input source for Zone  
2.  
Off button [68]  
This button is used to turn off the REC OUTs (i.e.,  
TAPE OUT, VIDEO 1 OUT, VIDEO 2 OUT) or  
Zone 2.  
3Audio Selector button [43, 65]  
Press to select the type of audio input signal.  
4Direct/Pure Audio button [46, 65]  
Press to switch between the direct and pure audio  
listening modes.  
GSetup button [29]  
Press to enter the Setup Menu. The OSD Menu will  
appear on the TV monitor as well as the front dis-  
play on the DTR-7.4.  
5Remote control sensor [7]  
6Display button [42]  
HEnter button [29]  
Press to display information about the current input  
source signal. Each time you press the Display but-  
ton, the screen changes to show you different infor-  
mation concerning the input signal.  
Press to display the screen for the item that is  
selected in the Setup Menu.  
IReturn button [29]  
7Dimmer button [41]  
In the Setup Menu, press to go back one level. If  
pressed while at the Main Menu, you will exit the  
Setup Menu.  
Press to set the brightness of the front display. There are  
three settings available: normal, dark, and very dark.  
The brightness of the front display can also be  
changed using the remote controller.  
JMaster Volume dial [40, 65]  
Use to control the volume in the main zone. The vol-  
ume for the remote zone (Zone 2) is independent.  
8Stereo button [46]  
Selects for the stereo listening mode.  
KVideo 5 Input terminals [23]  
9Surround button [46]  
For connecting a video camera or game device.  
Selects for the Dolby Pro Logic II, DTS Neo:6,  
Dolby Digital, or DTS listening modes.  
LInput source buttons and indicators (DVD,  
Video 1–5,Tape,Tuner, Phono, CD, and Net  
Audio) [35, 36, 40]  
0THX button [47]  
Selects for the THX listening mode.  
Press these buttons to select the input source for the  
main zone.  
ADSP  
/
buttons [47]  
To select the input source for the remote zone (Zone  
2) or recording out (REC OUT), first press the Zone  
2 or Rec Out button, and then press the desired  
input source button. The input channel with its indi-  
cator lit red is output to REC OUT and the one with  
its indicator lit green is output to ZONE 2.  
Switches to the DSP (Digital Signal Processing) modes.  
BFront display  
CMemory button [49]  
Press to assign the radio station to which you are  
currently tuned to a preset channel or press to delete  
a previously preset station.  
MUpsampling indicator [55]  
Lights during upsampling. This function is available  
when the input source is Analog/PCM and the lis-  
tening mode is set to the stereo or surround mode.  
DFM Mode button [48, 49]  
Press to change the stereo mode from AUTO to  
MONO and vice versa. Each time this button is  
pressed, the AUTO indication turns on and off indicat-  
ing the current mode. If you are listening to an FM  
radio station in stereo and the sound cuts out or there is  
a great deal of noise, switch from AUTO to MONO.  
NPhones jack [40]  
This is a standard stereo jack for connecting stereo  
headphones.  
OPure Audio indicator [46]  
ETuning  
/
buttons [48]  
Lights during pure audio playback.  
These buttons used to tune into radio stations and to  
select items on the onscreen setup menus (OSD).  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index Parts and Facilities—Continued  
Front Panel Display  
FM STEREO indicator  
A Input signal path indicators  
Lights when an FM broadcast station is being  
received in stereo. Turns off when placed into the  
monaural mode.  
Shows from which terminal the input signal is com-  
ing.  
B Listening mode or digital input format  
indicators  
D Multi function display  
During normal operation, shows the current input  
source and volume. When the FM or AM input is  
selected, shows the frequency and preset number.  
When the Display button is pressed, shows the lis-  
tening mode and input source format. However,  
does not show the source format when the FM or  
AM source is selected.  
One of these indicators lights to show the format of  
the current input source. In addition, one of the lis-  
tening mode indicators lights to indicate the current  
listening mode.  
C Tuning indicators  
AUTO indicator  
Lights when receiving FM broadcasts in the stereo  
mode. Turns off when placed into the monaural  
mode.  
E Volume display  
Shows the volume level.  
F SLEEP indicator  
TUNED indicator  
Lights when a radio station is being received.  
Lights when the sleep timer is turned on.  
Rear Panel  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
FRONT SPEAKERS  
SURR SPEAKERS  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
AV RECEIVER  
MONITOR  
R
L
R
L
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
-
MODEL NO. DTR 7.4  
:
RATING AC 120V  
60Hz 8.1A  
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
SURR  
AC OUTLETS  
PR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT  
Y
1
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
SURR  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
BACK/  
2
3
PB  
PR  
ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
2
AUDIO  
R
L
AC 120V  
SWITCHED  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
60Hz  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
R
L
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
IR  
AC INLET  
IN  
A
ZONE  
2
12V  
R
L
OPT  
1
OUT  
IN  
TRIGGER OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
RS232  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
OUT  
B
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index Parts and Facilities—Continued  
For more information regarding connection procedures,  
see pages indicated in brackets [ ].  
connect a DVD recorder, see page 22; and to con-  
nect a digital satellite tuner, see page 22.  
1 DIGITAL IN/OUT [21-24]  
D RS 232  
These jacks are for connecting components with  
digital input and output capabilities. To connect a  
CD player, see page 23; to connect an MD or CD  
recorder, see page 24; to connect a DAT deck, see  
page 24; to connect a DVD player, see page 21; to  
connect a DVD recorder, see page 22; and to con-  
nect a digital satellite tuner, see page 22.  
This port is for connecting the DTR-7.4 to home  
automation and external controllers.  
E IR IN/OUT [69]  
These connectors are for connecting the remote sen-  
sor of a multi-room kit (sold separately).  
F 12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2 A/B [71]  
These connectors are used to connect to the 12V  
TRIGGER IN terminal of a component.  
2 PRE OUT [18, 25, 66]  
To use the DTR-7.4 as a preamplifier, connect a  
power amplifier to this jack.  
G
[26]  
This jack is for connecting other Integra/Onkyo  
3 ANTENNA [14]  
components equipped with the same  
The audio connection cables must also be con-  
nected.  
terminal.  
These jacks are for connecting the FM indoor  
antenna and the AM loop antenna that are supplied  
with the DTR-7.4.  
H AC INLET [27]  
4 ZONE 2 OUT [66]  
This connector is for connecting the supplied power  
cord.  
This jack is for connecting the component that will  
be used in the remote zone (Zone 2).  
5 MONITOR OUT VIDEO/S VIDEO [20]  
These jacks are for connecting to the video input  
jacks on television monitors or projectors.  
6 COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT [20]  
These jacks are for connecting to the component  
video input jacks on television monitors or projectors.  
7 ETHERNET (Net-Tune) [73]  
This connector is for connecting to an Ethernet network.  
8 SPEAKERS [18, 66]  
These terminals are for connecting the speakers.  
9 AC OUTLETS [24]  
This AC outlet is provided to plug in the power cord  
from another component. The shape and number of  
the AC outlet depend on the shipping destination.  
0 MULTI CH INPUT [64]  
This connector is for connecting components with a  
multichannel output.  
A PHONO/CD/TAPE AUDIO IN/OUT [23, 24]  
These connectors are for connecting to the audio  
input and output jacks on audio components. To  
connect a turntable, see page 23; to connect a CD  
player, see page 23; and to connect a cassette tape  
deck, MD recorder, or CD recorder, see page 24.  
B DVD/VIDEO1-4 IN/OUT [21, 22]  
These connectors are for connecting to the video  
input and output jacks on video components. To  
connect a DVD player, see page 21; to connect a  
DVD recorder, see page 22; to connect a VCR, see  
page 21; and to connect a digital satellite tuner, see  
page 22.  
C COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT1/2 [21, 22]  
These connectors are for connecting to the compo-  
nent video outputs of video components that have  
them. To connect a DVD player, see page 21; to  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Controller  
The DTR-7.4’s remote controller is a multipurpose  
device that can be used to control not just the DTR-7.4  
but your other AV components as well. This section  
explains how its various operating modes can be used to  
control the DTR-7.4. When you use the Net-Tune mode,  
see page 74 for details. See page 84 for information on  
using the remote controller to control Onkyo compo-  
nents and TVs, VCRs, and AV components made by  
other manufacturers.  
BTHX button [47]  
This button is used to select the THX listening  
modes.  
CSurround button [46]  
This button is used to select the Dolby and DTS lis-  
tening modes.  
DDirect button [46, 65]  
This button is used to select the Direct listening  
mode.  
For detailed information, refer to the pages in parenthe-  
sis.  
EPure A button [46, 65]  
This button is used to select the Pure Audio listen-  
ing mode.  
Amp Mode  
Scroll wheel  
Amp mode is used to control the DTR-7.4. To select  
Amp mode, press the scroll wheel. “AMP” appears  
on the display.  
Note:  
While neither the Input button nor Mode button is illu-  
minated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input  
source and remote controller mode simultaneously.  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
Input  
1On button [27]  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
This button is used to turn on the DTR-7.4.  
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
2Standby button [27]  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
This button is used to set the DTR-7.4 to Standby.  
7
8
9
3Number/letter buttons [48, 49]  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
10  
Clear  
0
These buttons are used to enter numbers and letters.  
-- ---  
/
Direct Tuning  
4Custom button [94-98]  
Custom  
This button is used to access various settings that  
you can use to customize the operation of the  
remote controller.  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone2  
Input  
5Macro button [95]  
Dimmer  
Sleep  
This button is used with the Macro function.  
TV  
Input  
6Mode button  
+
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
the remote controller modes.  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
7Dimmer button [41]  
-
This button is used to adjust the display brightness.  
8Up/Down/Left/Right  
/
/
/
& Enter  
Display  
Muting  
buttons  
These buttons are used to select items on the  
onscreen setup menus (OSD). The Enter button is  
also used to enter names and to confirm settings.  
Step/Slow  
Rec  
Random  
9 CH/Disc +/button [49)  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Pure A  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
This button is used to select radio presets.  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
-
A B  
0 Return/Exit button  
Direct  
This button is used to return to the previously dis-  
played onscreen setup menu (OSD).  
-
+
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Level  
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Artist  
L Night  
Genre  
-
ADisplay button [42]  
Re EQ  
Caps  
Language  
Location  
This button is used to display various information  
about the currently selected input source.  
-
RC 550M  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Controller—Continued  
FTestTone, CH SEL, Level& Level+ buttons TRe-EQ button [55]  
[35]  
This button is used to turn on and off the Re-EQ  
These buttons are used to adjust the level of each  
speaker individually. These functions can be set  
only with the remote controller. The Level– and  
Level+ buttons are also used to adjust the volume in  
Zone 2.  
function.  
UL Night button [55]  
This button is used to set the Late Night function.  
GAudio SEL button [43]  
This button is used to select the audio input signal  
format: analog, digital, or multichannel.  
HLIGHT button  
This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-  
troller’s illuminated buttons.  
IDirect Tuning button [48]  
This button is used with the number buttons to  
select a radio station by entering its frequency. Press  
this button first, and then use the number buttons to  
enter the frequency.  
JDisplay  
The top line of this LCD display shows the name of  
the currently selected input source. The bottom line  
shows the currently selected remote controller  
mode.  
KZone 2 button [68]  
This button is used when you want to set the volume  
and input source for Zone 2.  
LInput button [40]  
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
the name of the input source appears on the display.  
MSleep button [41]  
This button is used to set the Sleep function. This  
function can be set only with the remote controller.  
NVOL  
button [40, 65]  
This button is used to set the volume of the  
DTR-7.4.  
OSetup/Guide button [29]  
This button is used to access the onscreen setup  
menus (OSD) that appear on the TV.  
PMuting button [40]  
This button is used to mute the DTR-7.4. This func-  
tion can be set only with the remote controller.  
QAll CH ST button [47]  
This button is used to select the All Ch Stereo listen-  
ing mode.  
RStereo button [46]  
This button is used to select the Stereo listening  
mode.  
S
DSP/DSP  
buttons [47]  
These buttons are used to select the DSP (digital  
signal processor) listening modes.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Antenna  
This chapter explains how to connect the supplied  
indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to  
connect commercially available outdoor FM and AM  
antennas.  
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna  
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use  
only.  
AM antenna push terminals  
FM antenna connector  
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting  
the tabs into the base, as shown.  
1
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
FRONT SPEAKERS  
SURR SPEAKERS  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
AV RECEIVER  
MODEL NO. DTR-7.4  
R
L
R
L
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
RATING: AC 120V  
60Hz 8.1A  
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
SURR  
AC OUTLETS  
R
L
BACK  
ZONE  
/
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
SURR  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
BACK/  
2
3
PB  
PR  
ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
2
AUDIO  
R
L
AC 120V  
SWITCHED  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
60Hz  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
R
L
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
I
R
AC INLET  
IN  
A
ZONE  
2
R
L
12  
V
OPT  
1
OUT  
IN  
TRIGGER OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
RS232  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
OUT  
B
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
Connect both wires of the AM loop  
antenna to the AM push terminals, as  
shown.  
2
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna  
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.  
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so  
they can be connected in either terminal.)  
Make sure that the wires are attached securely  
and that the push terminals are gripping the bare  
wires, not the insulation.  
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.  
1
I USA and Canadian Model  
FM  
75  
Insert the plug fully  
into the socket.  
I Australian Models  
Push  
Insert wire  
Release  
FM  
75  
AM  
Insert the plug fully  
into the socket  
Once your DTR-7.4 is ready for use, you’ll need  
to tune into an FM radio station and adjust the  
position of the FM antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception.  
Once your DTR-7.4 is ready for use, you’ll need  
to tune into an AM radio station and adjust the  
position of the AM antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception. Keep the antenna as far away  
as possible from your DTR-7.4, TV, speaker  
cables, and power cords.  
Use thumbtacks or something similar to  
x the FM antenna into position.  
2
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor AM loop antenna, try using a commercially  
available outdoor AM antenna (See page 15).  
Thumbtacks, etc.  
Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure your-  
self when using thumbtacks.  
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor FM antenna, try using a commercially available  
outdoor FM antenna instead (See page 15).  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Antenna—Continued  
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna  
Move the small wire inside the adapter  
from position A to position B, as shown.  
3
4
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor FM antenna, try using a commercially available  
outdoor FM antenna instead.  
Position A  
Wire  
Position B  
FM  
75  
Insert the central conductor (1), as  
shown, and use a small pair of pliers to  
clamp the shielding and outer insulation  
sections of the cable (2), as shown.  
1
Notes:  
Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable results  
can sometimes be obtained when installed in an attic or loft.  
For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well away  
for tall buildings, preferably with a clear line of sight to your  
local FM transmitter.  
Outdoor antennas should be located away from possible  
noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.  
For safety reasons, outdoor antennas should be situated well  
away from power lines and other high-voltage equipment.  
Outdoor antennas must be grounded in accordance with local  
regulations to prevent electric shock hazards.  
2
Make sure the shielding is not touching the cen-  
tral conductor.  
Ret the adapters cover, and then plug  
the adapter into the 75 socket.  
5
Using the 75/300 ohm Antenna Adapter  
(Australian model only)  
Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter  
The 75/300 ohm antenna adapter can be used to connect  
an FM antenna using either 75 ohm coaxial cable or  
300 ohm twin-core flat cable.  
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV  
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If circum-  
stances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as shown.  
Connecting 300 ohm Flat Cable  
Using a screwdriver, loosen  
1
the two screws on the adapter,  
wrap the bare wires around the  
screws, and then retighten  
them, as shown.  
TV/FM antenna splitter  
To AV receiver  
To TV (or VCR)  
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna  
Plug the adapter into the 75 socket.  
2
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied  
AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used  
in addition to the loop antenna, as shown.  
Outdoor antenna (aerial)  
Connecting 75 ohm Coaxial Cable  
Strip and prepare the  
75 ohm coaxial cable, as  
shown.  
15 mm  
1
6
3
6
Insulated antenna cable  
AM loop antenna  
mm mm mm  
1/4" 1/8" 1/4"  
5/8"  
AM  
Using your ngernails or a small screw-  
driver, lever the adapters tabs outward  
and remove the cover, as shown.  
2
Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed outside  
horizontally, but good results can sometimes be obtained  
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note  
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.  
Outdoor antennas must be grounded in accordance with  
local regulations to prevent electric shock hazards.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About HomeTheater  
Enjoying Home Theater  
The DTR-7.4 has many excellent features to recreate a clear three-dimensional sound image and lively sound movement.  
This enables you to easily enjoy rich sound effects just like you were in a theater or concert hall at home.  
For the DTR-7.4, We recommend you to use the THX-certified THX speaker system for THX Surround EX playback.  
When playing a DVD, you can enjoy sound effects provided by DTS, Dolby Digital or THX, depending on recording  
formats. In addition, you can enjoy Integra’s proprietary DSP surround playback for TV or digital satellite broadcasts.  
How to use speakers  
When you have two speakers, they are used for front left and right speakers (2 channel playback).  
When you have three speakers, they are used for front left, front right and center speakers (3 channel surround  
playback).  
When you have four speakers, they are used for front left, front right, surround left, and surround right speakers (4  
channel surround playback).  
When you have five speakers, they are used for front left, front right, center, surround left and surround right  
speakers (5 channel surround playback).  
When you have six speakers, they are used for front left, front right, center, surround left, surround right and  
surround back speakers (6 channel surround playback).  
When you have seven speakers, they are used for front left, front right, center, surround left, surround right,  
surround back left, and surround back right speakers (7 channel surround playback).  
No matter how many speakers you use, a subwoofer can be used to produce powerful and heavy bass sound (0.1  
channel playback).  
Front left and right speakers  
Output overall sound. They play the most important role in a home theater system, by creating basic sound  
images and fields.  
Place the front speakers in front of the listener so that they point to the listener’s ears in the listening position  
for music and movies. Ideal speaker placement is so that they are located symmetrically.  
Center speaker  
Complements the sound effects from  
front left and right speakers to enrich  
and clear the sound image and move-  
ment. In movies, an actor's speech  
comes mainly from the center  
speaker.  
Place the center speaker as close as  
possible to the TV or monitor, point-  
ing it towards the listener’s ears.  
Also, keep the center speaker’s  
height at the same level as the front  
left and right speakers.  
Surround back speakers  
Enhance the sound space repre-  
sentation with surround channel  
signals. Recreating sound  
movement effects and sound  
fields behind the listener gives a  
more realistic experience.  
Subwoofer  
Outputs only bass sounds to  
enhance and complement bass  
sound effects. Place the sub-  
woofer either at the front corner  
of the room or at a position 1/3  
from either front corner of the  
room.  
Surround left and right speakers  
Enhance the sensation of being at a live performance by giving three-dimensional  
sound movement to the sound effects. Place the surround speakers at the side of  
the listener or at a position diagonally from the listener. Ideally, speakers should  
be placed symmetrically.  
• For optimum surround playback, set the distance between the listener and the speakers so that the time it takes the  
sound to reach the listener is constant.Also, you need to set each speaker volume level individually in order to balance  
the volume level between speakers (See pages 32 and 35).  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speaker Placement  
Before connecting the speakers, it is very important to  
place them properly to create the optimum sound space  
for your listening pleasure. During placement and  
connection, be sure to refer to the manuals and  
instructions that came with the speakers. Furthermore,  
be aware that for surround playback, the configuration  
and placement of your speakers are both very important.  
Ideal speaker placement varies depending on the size of  
your room and the wall coverings. Here, only typical  
examples of speaker placement and recommendations  
are shown.  
In order to create the optimum conditions for the best  
sound quality, be sure to place all the speakers so that the  
greatest difference between the distances of each  
speaker to the listening position is less than 20 feet (6  
meters).  
Surround back speakers  
• Place these speakers so that  
their height is 3 feet (1 meter)  
higher than that of the listener’s  
ears.  
10  
• When using surround back left  
and right speakers, place them  
behind the listener so that the  
angles between the lines from  
each speaker to the listener and  
a line straight back from the  
listener are about 30 degrees.  
8
9
Layout with dipolar  
speakers  
Layout with monopolar  
speakers  
2
2
1
4
1
5
3
4
5
3
Important Points Regarding Speaker Placement  
Front left and right speakers and center speaker  
• Place these three speakers all at the same height.  
• Place each speaker so that it is aimed at the location of  
the listener’s ears when at the listening position.  
• Place the right and left peakers at equal distances on  
either side of the listening point.  
6
7
6
7
10  
10  
Surround left and right speakers  
• Place these speakers so that their height is 3 feet (1  
meter) higher than that of the listener’s ears.  
8
9
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TV or screen  
Subwoofer  
Front left speaker  
Center speaker  
8
Surround back left  
speaker  
Surround back right  
speaker  
Subwoofer  
9
When bass sound is reproduced, its volume and quality  
greatly depend on subwoofer placement. Those  
characteristics also depend on the shape of your listening  
room as well as your listening point. Generally, good  
bass sound is obtained when the subwoofer is placed in  
the corner of the room or at a point 1/3 the length of the  
room.  
Front right speaker  
10 Listening position  
Surround left speaker  
Surround right  
speaker  
Most dipoles are marked with an arrow to indicate how  
they should be oriented in the room. For correct  
acoustical phasing in the room, dipolar surround  
speakers should be placed so that their arrows point  
forward toward the screen; and dipolar surround back  
speakers should be placed so that their arrows point  
toward each other.  
Corner  
1/3 room  
length  
To optimize the subwoofer placement, we  
recommend:  
• Playing a movie or music source containing good  
quality bass sound,  
• Experimenting while changing subwoofer’s position  
in the room, and  
• Repositioning the subwoofer until you obtain the most  
out of the bass sound while fixing the listening point.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Speakers  
After determining the layout of your speaker system, it  
is now necessary to connect the speakers correctly to  
your DTR-7.4.  
• Do not connect more than one speaker cable to one  
speaker terminal. Doing so may damage the DTR-7.4.  
• Connect either your surround back speakers or the  
speakers you will be using in the remote zone (Zone  
2) to the SURR BACK/ZONE 2 SPEAKERS  
terminals (See page 66).  
You can also use banana plugs/connectors.  
Caution:  
Connect only speakers with an impedance between 4 and  
16 to the DTR-7.4. If the impedance of even one  
speaker is between 4 and 6 , be sure to set the speaker  
impedance setting accordingly (See page 30).  
Using the Speaker Cable Labels  
The positive speaker terminals on the DTR-7.4 are color  
coded for easy identification. Attach the supplied  
speaker labels to the speaker cables, and then match the  
colors on the speaker cables to the corresponding  
terminals.  
Notes:  
• Even if you are using only one speaker or listening to  
monaural (mono) sound, never connect a single speaker  
in parallel to both the right and left-channel terminals.  
Speaker cable label  
Speaker cable label  
R
L
R
R
L
L
+
+
+
+
R
L
To prevent damage to circuitry,  
never short-circuit the positive (+)  
and negative (–) speaker wire.  
• Be sure to connect the positive and  
negative cables for the speakers  
properly. If they are mixed up, the  
left and right signals will be reversed  
and the audio will sound unnatural.  
The speaker channels are colored as follows:  
Front left speaker (+): White  
Front right speaker (+): Red  
Center speaker (+): Green  
Surround left speaker (+): Blue  
Surround right speaker (+): Grey  
Surround back/Zone 2 left speaker (+): Brown  
Surround back/Zone 2 right speaker (+): Tan  
Use the PRE OUT  
Front  
right  
speaker  
Front  
left  
speaker  
Surround  
right  
speaker  
Surround  
left  
speaker  
SUBWOOFER jack to  
connect a subwoofer with a  
built-in power amplifier. If  
your subwoofer does not have  
a built-in amplifier, connect an  
amplifier to the PRE OUT  
SUBWOOFER jack and the  
subwoofer to the amplifier.  
Subwoofer  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R
L
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
FRONT SPEAKERS  
SURR SPEAKERS  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
AV RECEIVER  
MONITOR  
OUT  
R
L
R
L
1
2
3
Y
-
MODEL NO. DTR 7.4  
:
RATING AC 120V  
60Hz 8.1A  
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
AC OUTLETS  
SURR  
R
L
INPUT  
Y
1
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
SURR  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
BACK/  
Connecting the speaker cable  
PB  
ZONE 2  
SPEAKERS  
AC 120V  
60Hz  
SWITCHED  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
1. Strip away approx. 5/8 inch (15 mm) of the  
R
L
wire insulation.  
INPUT  
Y
2
IR  
AC INLET  
A
ZONE  
2
2. Twist the wire ends tightly together.  
12V  
IN  
TRIGGER OUT  
PB  
PR  
RS232  
3. Unscrew the speaker terminal cap.  
4. Insert the exposed wire end.  
OUT  
B
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
5. Screw down the speaker terminal cap.  
1
2
3
4
5
Surround  
back  
5/8"  
(15mm)  
Center  
Surround  
back left  
speaker  
speaker  
right  
speaker  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AV Cables and Connectors  
• Always refer to the instructions that came with the  
component that you are connecting.  
• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections  
have been properly made.  
• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Improper  
connections can result in noise, poor performance,  
or damage to the equipment.  
Improper connection  
• For input jacks, red connectors (marked R) are  
used for the right channel, white connectors  
(marked L) are used for the left channel, and  
yellow connectors (marked V) are used for video  
connection.  
The optical digital jacks are all of shutter-type  
construction. Connect an optical cable by first  
making sure the cable is oriented correctly and  
then inserting it into the jack by pushing the  
shutter lid inwards.  
Inserted completely  
• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with  
power cords and speaker cables. Doing so may  
adversely affect the picture and sound quality.  
Rear optical jack  
Front optical jack  
Cables are depicted in the connection diagrams as shown below.  
Types of video connection cables and terminals  
Cable forms Terminal shapes  
Cable names  
Description  
Component video separates the luminance  
(Y) and color difference signals (PR, PB),  
providing the best picture quality. Some TV  
manufacturers label their component video  
inputs differently.  
Y
Y
Component video  
connection cable  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
The video quality is higher than the one  
using the composite video connection. The  
video component control signals such as  
aspect ratio signal cannot be sent through  
this connection.  
S video connection  
cable  
This is the standard video connection  
method and most of the video components  
like TV and VCR are equipped with the  
terminals of this type.  
Video connection  
cable  
Types of audio connection cables and terminals  
Cable forms Terminal shapes  
Cable names  
Optical cable  
Description  
You can enjoy various type of digital sound  
including Dolby Digital format sound. The  
sound quality is equal to the one available  
through the coaxial cable connection.  
You can enjoy various type of digital sound  
including Dolby Digital format sound. The  
sound quality is equal to the one available  
through the optical cable connection.  
Coaxial cable  
Audio connection  
cable  
This connection carries analog audio  
signals.  
These types of terminals will be found on  
DVD players that support DVD-Audio  
format.  
Multichannel  
connection cable  
R
L
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio/Video Equipment  
Here is an explanation of typical ways to connect various  
components to the DTR-7.4. There are many ways that  
any one component can be connected, and it is up to you  
to decide which method best fits your situation. The  
directions given here are only one option and should  
only be thought of as such. It is best to fully understand  
the nature of each connector and terminal as well as  
those of your components and their features to ascertain  
which method of connection is best.  
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT/OUTPUT  
For DVD players or other devices that have component  
video connectors, the DTR-7.4 has two banks of  
component video input connectors (Y, PB, PR) for direct  
component video input. The DTR-7.4 also has one bank  
of component video output connectors for direct  
component video output to the matrix decoder of a  
television, projector, or other display device. By sending  
the pure component video signal directly, the signal  
forgoes the extra processing that normally would  
degrade the image. The result is vastly increased image  
quality, with incredibly lifelike colors and crisp details.  
VIDEO IN/OUT  
These are the video inputs and outputs. On the rear  
panel, there are five video inputs and two video outputs  
and each one includes both composite video and S video  
configurations.  
Connect VCRs, VTRs, LD players, DVD players, and  
other video components to the video inputs. Connect  
VCRs, VTRs, and other recording components to the  
video outputs to make video recordings.  
• When connecting a VCR or other video component,  
make sure you connect its audio and video leads to the  
same bank (e.g., both to VIDEO 3).  
• The Video 5 inputs are located on the front panel.  
The flow of the video signals is as follows:  
recorders, CD recorders, DAT decks, or other similar  
components.  
• Since an analog connection must be made when using  
Rec Out or Zone 2, make sure that the connection to the  
input source is not digital only, but analog as well.  
• When using an optical input or output jack, always use  
an optical fiber cable.  
Connecting a Television Monitor or  
Projector (MONITOR OUT)  
The DTR-7.4 is equipped with a simple Y/C separate  
circuit and simple Y/C mixed circuit. Since both the  
signals from the S VIDEO and VIDEO inputs are output  
to the MONITOR OUT S VIDEO output, if the  
television or projector is equipped with an S video input,  
it is unnecessary to connect the video connectors. If it is  
equipped with only a video input, connect it to the  
MONITOR OUT VIDEO output.  
Using an RCA video connection cable, connect the  
video input jack (composite) of the device to the MON-  
ITOR OUT VIDEO jack of the DTR-7.4. Or if the  
device has an S video input jack, connect it to the  
MONITOR OUT S VIDEO jack of the DTR-7.4 using  
an S video connection cable. Or if the device has com-  
ponent video inputs, connect them to the bank of COM-  
PONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks on the DTR-7.4.  
When you use the connections described above, video  
signals that come in from S VIDEO and VIDEO IN are  
output to the TV, projector, etc.  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
A  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
R
L
OUTPUT  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
Y
INPUT  
Y
1
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
UDIO  
L
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
CD  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
Signals that comes in from COMPONENTVIDEO INPUT  
are only output to COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT.  
When connecting a video player to the COMPONENT  
VIDEO INPUT jacks, be sure to connect your television  
to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks.  
Signals that come in from VIDEO and S VIDEO IN are  
output to VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT  
VIDEO. When you connect a projector or monitor TV  
to COMPONENT VIDEO inputs, you do not have to  
connect them to VIDEO and S VIDEO inputs by setting  
the Video Setup Sub-menu (See page 38).  
TAPE  
IN  
IN  
L
R
L
AUDIO  
UDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
VIDEO  
IN  
S VIDEO  
IN  
Y
PB  
PR  
TV,  
projector,  
etc.  
Note that the OSD Menu data will be output to the  
MONITOR OUT VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO jacks. When you connect any OSD-spe-  
cific monitor TV to the VIDEO connectors, you can  
disable the OSD output to COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUTPUT. To disable the OSD output, select Setup  
Menu Preference OSD Setup Component  
Video, and then select “OSD Off” (See page 63).  
AUDIO IN/OUT  
These are the analog audio inputs and outputs. There are  
eight audio inputs and three audio outputs on the rear  
panel. The audio inputs and outputs require RCA-type  
connectors.  
DIGITAL IN/OUT  
On the rear panel of the DTR-7.4, there are three coaxial  
digital inputs, three optical digital inputs, and two  
optical digital outputs. To the digital inputs, connect CD  
players, LD players, DVD players, or other digital  
source components. To the digital output, connect MD  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio/Video Equipment—Continued  
Connecting a DVD Player (DVD)  
Connecting a Video Cassette  
Recorder (VIDEO 1)  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
OUT  
Y
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
INPUT 1  
AM  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
SURR  
Y
R
L
Y
SUB  
SURR  
CENTER  
R
L
BACK/  
AM  
PT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
SURR  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
AUDIO  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
R
L
ZONE  
2
PB  
PR  
R
L
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
SUB  
CENTER  
3
PHONO  
T  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
INPUT  
Y
2
2
3
PB  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
L
AL  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
IN  
COAX  
PHONO  
O
PR  
PB  
PR  
SURR  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
R
OPT  
1
R
L
1
IN  
DVD
SURR  
BACK  
2
OUT  
GND  
VIDEO 1  
IN  
R
L
DIGITAL  
OUT  
COAX  
AUDIO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
COMPONENT  
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
IN  
S VIDEO  
IN  
VIDEO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO OUT  
OUTPUT  
DVD player  
Using an RCA video connection cable, connect the  
video output jack (composite) of the DVD or LD player  
to the DVD VIDEO IN jack of the DTR-7.4. Or if the  
DVD or LD player has an S video output jack, connect it  
to the DVD S VIDEO IN jack with an S video  
connection cable. Or if the device has component video  
outputs, connect them to one of the banks of  
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks on the DTR-7.4.  
On the initial settings of the DTR-7.4, the DVD input  
source is set for the COMPONENTVIDEO INPUT 1  
jacks.  
VCR  
Using RCA video connection cables, connect the video  
output jack (composite) of the video cassette recorder to the  
VIDEO 1 VIDEO IN jack of the DTR-7.4 and connect the  
video input jack of the video cassette recorder to the  
VIDEO 1 VIDEO OUT jack of the DTR-7.4. Or if the  
video cassette recorder has S video input and output jacks,  
connect them to theVIDEO 1 SVIDEO IN and OUT jacks  
of the DTR-7.4 using S video connection cables. Or if the  
video cassette recorder has component video outputs,  
connect them to one of the banks of COMPONENT  
VIDEO INPUT jacks on the DTR-7.4.  
If you connect the DVD or LD player to the  
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT 2 jacks, this must be  
changed at Setup Menu Input Setup Video Setup  
Component Video (See page 38).  
Using an RCA audio connection cable, connect the  
audio output jacks of the DVD or LD player to the DVD  
AUDIO IN jacks of the DTR-7.4. Make sure that you  
properly connect the left channel to the L jack and the  
right channel to the R jack.  
On the initial settings of the DTR-7.4, the VIDEO 1  
input source is set for the COMPONENT VIDEO  
INPUT 2 jacks.  
If you connect the video cassette recorder to the  
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT 1 jacks, this must be  
changed at Setup Menu Input Setup Video Setup  
Component Video (See page 38).  
Using RCA audio connection cables, connect the audio  
output jacks of the video cassette recorder to theVIDEO  
1AUDIO IN jacks of the DTR-7.4 and connect the audio  
input jacks of the video cassette recorder to the VIDEO  
1 AUDIO OUT jacks of the DTR-7.4. Make sure that  
you properly connect the left channels to the L jacks and  
the right channels to the R jacks.  
If you are connecting a digital output device to the  
VIDEO 1 jack instead of a VCR, connect it to either the  
DIGITAL IN COAX jack or DIGITAL IN OPT jack,  
depending on the type of connector on the device.  
On the initial settings of the DTR-7.4, the VIDEO 1  
input source is set for digital input at the COAX 2 jack.  
If the digital connection is made at a different jack, this  
must be changed at Setup Menu Input Setup →  
Digital Setup (See page 36).  
If the device has a digital output, connect it to either the  
DIGITAL IN COAX jack or DIGITAL IN OPT jack of  
the DTR-7.4, depending on the type of connector on the  
DVD player.  
On the initial settings of the DTR-7.4, the DVD input  
source is set for digital input at the COAX 1 jack.  
If the digital connection is made at a different jack, this  
must be changed at Setup Menu Input Setup →  
Digital Setup (See page 36).  
Make sure of your DVD player’s digital output settings.  
You need to access the On Screen Menu of your DVD  
player. See the owner’s Manual on your DVD player.  
Also, you need to aware of the Table of contents for the  
movie, selecting the movie for Dolby Digital or DTS,  
depends how the movie is encoded.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio/Video Equipment—Continued  
On the initial settings of the DTR-7.4, the VIDEO 2  
Connecting a DVD Recorder or Other  
DigitalVideo Recording Device (VIDEO 2)  
input source is set for digital input at the COAX 3 jack.  
If the digital connection is made at a different jack, this  
must be changed at Setup Menu Input Setup →  
Digital Setup (See page 36).  
If the device has a digital input, connect it to the DIGI-  
TAL OUT OPT jack of the DTR-7.4 for digital record-  
ing of the REC OUT signal from the DTR-7.4.  
However, if the same device also has a digital output  
and it has already been connected to the DTR-7.4, you  
cannot connect the digital input of the device to the  
DIGITAL OUT jack of the DTR-7.4 simultaneously.  
Note:  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
DIGITAL  
IN  
COAX  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
INPUT 2  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
3
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
Y
SURR  
CD  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
OPT  
1
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPT  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
PB  
PR  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
O  
S
VIDEO  
1
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
R
L
OUT  
IN  
The output from the DIGITAL OUT jack of the DTR-7.4  
is only the digital signal input to the DIGITAL IN jack.  
R
L
VIDEO 2  
Connecting a Satellite Tuner,Televi-  
sion, or Settop Box (VIDEO 3 or 4)  
Satellite tuner, television, or settop box  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPT  
AUDIO  
OUT  
VIDEO S VIDEO  
AUDIO  
OUT  
VIDEO S VIDEO  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
R
L
R
L
Y
R
L
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
VIDEO S VIDEO  
OUTPUT OUTPUT  
PB  
PR  
DIGITAL  
IN  
OPT  
R
L
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO VIDEO S VIDEO  
INPUT INPUT INPUT  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
COAX  
Digital device  
DVD recorder  
IN  
VIDEO 3  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
Using RCA video connection cables, connect the video  
output jack (composite) of the device to the VIDEO 2  
VIDEO IN jack of the DTR-7.4 and connect the video  
input jack of the device to the VIDEO 2 VIDEO OUT  
jack of the DTR-7.4. Or if the device has S video input  
and output jacks, connect them to the VIDEO 2 S  
VIDEO IN and OUT jacks of the DTR-7.4 using S video  
connection cables. Or if the device has component video  
outputs, connect them to one of the banks of  
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks on the DTR-7.4.  
On the initial settings of the DTR-7.4, the VIDEO 2  
input source is set for the COMPONENT VIDEO  
INPUT 2 jacks.  
If you connect the device to the COMPONENT VIDEO  
INPUT 1 jacks, this must be changed at Setup Menu →  
Input Setup Video Setup Component Video (See  
page 38).  
Using RCA audio connection cables, connect the audio out-  
put jacks of the device to the VIDEO 2 AUDIO IN jacks of  
the DTR-7.4 and connect the audio input jacks of the device  
to the VIDEO 2 AUDIO OUT jacks of the DTR-7.4. Make  
sure that you properly connect the left channels to the L  
jacks and the right channels to the R jacks.  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
1
2
3
CE
SURR  
IN  
VIDEO 4  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
R
L
FRONT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
M
INP
R
2
3
PR  
R
L
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
OPT  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
R
L
OPT  
1
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
IN  
3
2
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
Using an RCA video connection cable, connect the  
video output jack (composite) of the device to the  
VIDEO 3 (or 4) VIDEO IN jack of the DTR-7.4. Or if  
the device has an S video output jack, connect it to the  
VIDEO 3 (or 4) S VIDEO IN jack of the DTR-7.4 using  
an S video connection cable. Or if the device has compo-  
nent video outputs, connect them to one of the banks of  
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks on the DTR-7.4.  
On the initial settings of the DTR-7.4, the VIDEO 3  
and 4 input sources are set for the COMPONENT  
VIDEO INPUT 2 jacks.  
If you connect the device to the COMPONENT VIDEO  
INPUT 1 jacks, this must be changed at Setup Menu Input  
Setup Video Setup Component Video (See page 38).  
Using an RCA audio connection cable, connect the  
audio output jack of the device to the VIDEO 3 (or 4)  
AUDIO IN jacks of the DTR-7.4. Make sure that you  
properly connect the left channel to the L jack and the  
right channel to the R jack.  
If the device has a digital output, connect it to either the  
DIGITAL IN COAX jack or DIGITAL IN OPT jack of the  
DTR-7.4, depending on the type of connector on the device.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio/Video Equipment—Continued  
When hooking up a TV with audio outputs, make sure  
Connecting a Compact Disc Player  
(CD)  
the TV’s audio output setting. You might have to go  
through the TV’s menu and set the TV Fixed audio  
output and then internal speakers off.  
If the device has a digital output, connect it to either the  
DIGITAL IN COAX jack or DIGITAL IN OPT jack of the  
DTR-7.4, depending on the type of connector on the device.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
ZONE  
2
PB  
SURR  
AUDIO  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
1  
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
R
L
DIGITAL  
IN  
OPT  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
CD  
IN  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
On the initial settings of the DTR-7.4, the VIDEO 3  
input source is set for digital input at the OPT 3 jack.  
If the digital connection is made at a different jack, this  
must be changed at Setup Menu Input Setup Digital  
Setup (See page 36).  
PHONO  
IN  
IN  
VIDEO  
2
INPUT  
2
SURR  
1
CD  
Y
DIGITAL  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
OPT  
1
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
On the initial settings of the DTR-7.4, the VIDEO 4  
input source is not set for digital input. If you are  
connecting a digital component, these settings must be  
changed at Setup Menu Input Setup Digital Setup  
(See page 36).  
AUDIO OUT  
R
L
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPT  
CD player  
Using an RCA audio connection cable, connect the  
output jacks of the compact disc player to the CD  
AUDIO jacks of the DTR-7.4. Make sure that you  
properly connect the left channel to the L jack and the  
right channel to the R jack.  
If the compact disc player has a digital output, connect it  
to either the DIGITAL IN COAX jack or DIGITAL IN  
OPT jack of the DTR-7.4, depending on the type of  
connector on the compact disc player.  
Connecting Video Camera, etc.  
(Video 5 Input)  
Using an RCA video connection cable, connect the  
video output jack (composite) of the device to the Video  
5 Video jack of the DTR-7.4. Or if the device has an S  
video output jack, connect it to the Video 5 S Video jack  
of the DTR-7.4 using an S video connection cable.  
Using an RCA audio connection cable, connect the  
audio output jack of the device to the Video 5 Audio  
jacks of the DTR-7.4. Make sure that you properly  
connect the left channel to the L jack and the right  
channel to the R jack.  
On the initial settings of the DTR-7.4, the CD input  
source is set for digital input at the OPT 1 jack.  
If the digital connection is made to a different jack, this  
must be changed at Setup Menu Input Setup Dig-  
ital Setup (See page 36).  
If the device has an optical digital output, connect it to  
the Video 5 Digital jack of the DTR-7.4.  
.
The Video 5 digital input is fixed to the OPTICAL  
input on the front panel.  
Connecting a Turntable (PHONO)  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
OMPONENT  
A
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
1
2
3
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
AM  
Front panel  
PHONO  
SURR  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
5  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
Video  
5
Input  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
S VIDEO DIGITAL  
OUT OUT  
IN  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
R
L
OPT  
1
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
-
DTR 7.4  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
Video camera/ Video  
game (Video 5 Input)  
Ground wire (earth)  
AUDIO OUT  
R
VIDEO  
OUT  
Using an RCA audio connection cable, connect the  
output jacks of the turntable to the PHONO audio jacks  
of the DTR-7.4. Make sure that you properly connect the  
left channel to the L jack and the right channel to the R  
jack.  
L
L
L
R
R
Note:  
The DTR-7.4 is designed for use with moving magnet  
cartridges. For proper operation, connect a ground (or  
earth) wire to the GND terminal. For some turntables,  
however, connecting the ground wire may cause  
increased noise, and in such a case, a ground wire is not  
necessary and should not be connected.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio/Video Equipment—Continued  
Connecting a Cassette Tape Deck,  
MD Recorder, DAT Deck, or CD  
Recorder (TAPE)  
Connecting the Power Cords from  
Other Devices  
The DTR-7.4 is equipped with AC mains outlets for  
connecting the power cords from other devices so that  
their power is supplied through the DTR-7.4. By doing  
this, you can leave the connected device turned on and  
have the Standby/On button on the DTR-7.4 turn on and  
off the device together with the DTR-7.4.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
DIGITAL  
IN  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OU
IN  
OUT  
OPT  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
2
PHONO  
IN  
TAPE  
IN  
SURR  
CD  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
The shape, number, and total capacity of the AC  
outlets may differ depending on the area of purchase.  
OPT  
1
OUT  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPT  
SURR  
BACK  
IN  
TAPE  
2
IN  
R
L
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
1
Caution:  
Make sure that the total capacity of the components  
connected to the DTR-7.4 does not exceed the capacity  
that is printed on the rear panel (e.g., TOTAL 120W).  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPT  
DIGITAL  
IN  
OPT  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO IN  
AC OUTLET  
AC OUTLETS  
AC 120V 60Hz  
SWITCHED  
-
AC 230 240V  
50 Hz  
SWITCHED 100W MAX.  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
MD recorder, DAT deck, Cassette tape deck, MD recorder,  
or CD recorder DAT deck, or CD recorder  
Using RCA audio connection cables, connect the output  
jacks (PLAY) of the device to the TAPE AUDIO IN jacks  
of the DTR-7.4 and connect the input jacks (REC) of the  
device to the TAPE AUDIO OUT jacks of the DTR-7.4.  
Make sure that you properly connect the left channels to  
the L jacks and the right channels to the R jacks.  
Australian model  
USA and Canadian models  
If the device has a digital output, connect it to either the  
DIGITAL IN COAX jack or DIGITAL IN OPT jack of the  
DTR-7.4, depending on the type of connector on the device.  
On the initial settings of the DTR-7.4, theTAPE input  
source is set for digital input at the OPT 2 jack.  
If the digital connection is made to a different jack, this  
must be changed at Setup Menu Input Setup →  
Digital Setup (See page 36).  
If the device has a digital input, connect it to the  
DIGITAL OUT OPT jack of the DTR-7.4 for digital  
recording of the REC OUT signal from the DTR-7.4.  
However, if the same device also has a digital output and  
it has already been connected to the DTR-7.4, you  
cannot connect the digital input of the device to the  
DIGITAL OUT jack of the DTR-7.4 simultaneously.  
Note:  
The output from the DIGITAL OUT jack of the DTR-7.4  
is only the digital signal input to the DIGITAL IN jack.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio/Video Equipment—Continued  
Connecting Auxiliary Power Amplier  
These jacks are for connecting an auxiliary power  
amplifier.  
You can use an auxiliary power amplifier to listen at  
louder volumes than you can with the DTR-7.4 alone.  
When using a power amplifier, connect each speaker to  
the power amplifier.  
L
to White  
Front  
PRE OUT  
R
LL  
PRE OUT  
R L  
A
FRONT  
FRONT  
SUB  
R
to Red  
Subwoofer  
CENTER  
SUB  
to Purple  
L
SURR  
SURR  
SURR  
SURR  
BACK/  
ZONE 2  
R
L
BACK/  
to Brown  
ZONE  
2
FRONT  
MULTI  
INPUT  
C
2
R
to Tan  
L
to Blue  
Surround  
back  
R
to Gray  
Surround  
to Green  
Center  
R
L
R
L
R
L
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
R
L
R
L
R
L
Power amplier  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1. Front left speaker  
2. Front right speaker  
3. Subwoofer  
4. Surround back left  
speaker  
6. Surround left  
speaker  
7. Surround right  
speaker  
8. Center speaker  
5. Surround back right  
speaker  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting -compatible AV Components  
The  
terminal on the DTR-7.4 is for connecting other  
• When performing operations with  
-connected  
Integra/Onkyo components equipped with the same  
terminal. When a component is connected to the  
terminal, it can be operated by the remote controller  
supplied with the DTR-7.4. In addition, when you  
components using the  
remote zone (Zone 2).  
• For remote control operation, the audio connection  
cables must also be connected.  
system, do not use the  
connect a component to the  
perform the system operations given below.  
terminal, you can also  
• If a component has two  
terminals, you can use  
either one to connect to the DTR-7.4. The other one  
can be used to daisy chain with another component.  
• With Integra/Onkyo DVD players, you can enter the  
pre-program code so that you can operate the DVD  
player directly with the remote controller without  
Power on/ready function  
When the DTR-7.4 is in the standby state, if an  
connected component is turned on, the DTR-7.4 also  
turns on and the input source selected at the DTR-7.4  
automatically switches to that component.  
-
connecting the  
terminals (See page 89).  
Beawarethatthisfunctionwillnotworkifthepowercordforthe  
-connected component is connected to theAC OUTLET on  
the DTR-7.4, or if the DTR-7.4 has already been turned on.  
DTR-7.4  
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
Direct change function  
When the play button is pressed on an  
-connected  
component, the input source selected at the DTR-7.4  
automatically changes to that component.  
connector  
Power off function  
Ex: Integra/Onkyo CD  
player  
When the DTR-7.4 is placed in the standby state, all  
-connected components are also automatically put  
into the standby state.  
connector  
Also, if you press the On button on the DTR-7.4 remote  
Ex: Onkyo cassette tape  
deck  
controller while the DTR-7.4 is turned on, all  
-
connected components (DVD players, CD players, MD  
recorders, tuners, etc.) are also turned on.  
Remote control cable  
Connections for Remote Control (  
)
To connect components using the  
connect a remote control cable from this  
terminal of the other component.An  
terminal, simply  
terminal to the  
remote control  
cable with a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) miniature two-conductor plug  
comes with every cassette tape deck, compact disc player,  
MD recorder, and DVD player that has an  
terminal.  
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
Integra/Onkyo DVD player  
DIGITAL OUT  
COAX  
L
R
ANALOG  
OUTPUT  
Remote  
control  
cable  
DIGITAL  
IN  
COAX  
AUDIO  
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
R
L
1
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
FRONT SPEAKE
SURR SPEAKERS  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
R
L
R
L
1
2
3
Y
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
SURR  
PR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
2
3
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
R
L
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
IR  
A
IN  
A
ZONE  
2
R
L
12V  
OPT  
OUT  
IN  
TRIGGER OUT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
RS232  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
OUT  
B
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the Power  
Standby/On  
Turning on the Power  
Standby indicator  
Plug the power cord into an AC  
wall outlet.  
The Standby indicator will light up.  
1
2
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
T
uning  
Standby  
Standby  
Return  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
Phones  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
Press the Standby/On button to  
turn on the DTR-7.4.  
Standby/On  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DTR-7.4  
The display will light up and the Standby  
indicator will turn off.  
To wall outlet  
If you press the Standby/On button  
again, the DTR-7.4 returns to the standby  
state.  
Standby  
On  
1
Standby  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
Turn off  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Turning on the Power from the  
Remote Controller  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Scroll Wheel  
Input  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
+
Before you can use the remote controller, you must  
perform steps 1 above and place the DTR-7.4 in the  
standby state.  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
Display  
Muting  
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
Press the scroll wheel.  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
A-B  
1
Pure  
A
Direct  
“AMP” appears on the remote control-  
ler’s display. This is the mode for con-  
trolling the DTR-7.4.  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
-
Level  
+
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Genre  
Re-EQ  
L
Caps  
Location  
-
RC 550M  
• Before you plug in the DTR-7.4, confirm that all con-  
nections have been made properly.  
Press the On button to turn on the  
DTR-7.4.  
To set the DTR-7.4 to Standby, press the  
Standby button.  
• Turning on the power may cause a momentary power  
surge, which might interfere with other electrical  
equipment on the same circuit, such as computers. If  
this happens, use a wall outlet on a different circuit.  
2
On  
Connecting the Supplied Power Cord  
Note:  
Any components connected via  
on when the remote controller’s On button is pressed.  
will also be turned  
Plug the supplied power cord into this AC INLET.  
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied  
with the DTR-7.4. The power cord supplied is  
designed for use with the DTR-7.4 and should not be  
used with any other device.  
• Never have the power cord disconnected from the  
DTR-7.4 while the other end is plugged into the wall  
outlet. Doing so may cause an electric shock. Always  
connect by plugging into the wall outlet last and dis-  
connect by unplugging from the wall outlet first.  
Memory backup  
The DTR-7.4 uses a battery-less memory backup sys-  
tem in order to retain radio presets and other settings  
when it is unplugged or in the case of a power failure.  
Although no batteries are required, the DTR-7.4 must  
be plugged into an AC outlet in order to charge the  
backup system.  
Once it has been charged, the DTR-7.4 will retain the  
settings for several weeks, although this depends on the  
environment and time will be shorter in humid climates.  
AC INLET  
DO NOT con-  
nect the  
Power cord  
power cord at  
(supplied)  
this time.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Menu  
When making the various settings required to configure your DTR-7.4 for optimum performance, you can either use the  
OSD Menu that appears on your television monitor or you can use the display on the front of the DTR-7.4. The OSD  
Menu is a settings menu that is displayed on your TV monitor. For your reference when performing the setting proce-  
dures, this manual shows both the OSD Menu displayed on your television monitor and the display on the front of the  
DTR-7.4.  
The Setup Menu consists of the Basic Menu that is divided up into 4 menus, the Hardware Setup Menu, the Speaker  
Setup Menu, the Input Setup Menu, and the Audio Adjust Menu, and the Advanced Menu that contains the menus of  
the Basic Menu, the Preference Menu, and the Network Setup Menu. These menus are then divided up into various sub-  
menus, and these contain settings for you to optimize your home theater as you wish.  
The display shown below is an example. The actual contents of your display may differ depending on the model of your  
region and the selected input source.  
Advanced  
Menu  
Basic  
Menu  
Note:  
The Hardware Setup Menu is accessible from the Basic  
Menu at an initial setting. After being brought up on the  
screen and setting any of its items, the menu is no longer  
available from the Basic Menu.  
Basic Menu  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
In this case, you can gain access to the menu via the  
Advanced Menu.”  
3.Audio Adjust  
30  
32  
Advanced Menu  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
Basic Menu  
36  
38  
38  
52  
53  
Your DTR-7.4 is provided with a  
Basic Menu for those who are not  
familiar with many of the advanced  
settings of an AV receiver or for  
those who wish to watch movies and  
listen to music with a minimal  
amount of setup. With the Basic  
Menu, the settings that rarely need to  
be set or that are only needed for  
advanced fine-tuning of the sound  
quality are not displayed.  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
64  
1.Digital Setup  
2.Multichannel Setup  
3.Video Setup  
4.Character Input  
5.IntelliVolume  
6.Listening Mode Preset  
7.12V Trigger  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
56  
71  
3.Audio Adjust  
Advanced Menu  
54  
54  
55  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
4.Preference  
1.Tone Control  
2.Surround Speakers  
3.Sound Effect  
4.Delay  
5.LFE Level  
5.Network Setup  
6.Mono  
7.Theater-Dimensional  
8.Surround  
Basic Menu  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
Advanced Menu  
3.Audio Adjust  
57  
The Advanced Menu provides fea-  
tures such as the Listening Mode  
Presets that allow you to customize  
the output sound for movies and  
music just the way you like and the  
AV Sync Setup that allows you to  
adjust for discrepancies between the  
video and audio timing.  
9.THX  
10.Mono Movie  
11.Enhance  
12.Orchestra  
13.Unplugged  
14.Studio-Mix  
15.TV Logic  
default  
62  
76  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Menu—Continued  
OSD  
Advanced Menu  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
4.Preference  
1.Speaker Setup  
1.Speaker Config  
5.Network Setup  
1-1.Speaker Config  
Basic Menu  
2.Speaker Distance  
3.Level Calibration  
a.Subwoofer  
b.Front L/R  
c.Center  
:Yes  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
:Small  
:Small  
:Small  
:Small  
Front panel  
dispaly  
d.Surr L/R  
e.Surr Back  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
f.Crossover:80Hz(THX)  
Main menu  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Menu  
Sub-menu  
µ
Navigating Through the Setup Menu  
Press the scroll wheel when using  
the remote controller.  
1
2
You can change settings in the Setup Menu using the  
buttons on the front panel and on the remote controller.  
The buttons on the remote controller correspond to  
those on the DTR-7.4 as shown below.  
Press the Setup button.  
The main menu (Advanced Menu or  
Basic Menu) appears on your television  
monitor.  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
On  
Standby  
Tuning  
TV  
Input  
Return  
1
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
Preset  
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
Using the and cursor buttons,  
select the menu that you want to  
enter.  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
4
5
6
3
4
5
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Clear  
7
8
9
2
(GRN)  
ec (RED)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
Custom  
DTR-7.4  
Enter  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Input  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
Setup/Enter/  
Return/Cursor  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
Press the Enter button to enter the  
selected menu.  
The screen for that menu appears.  
/
/
/
Display  
Muting  
Enter  
Button on remote controller Button on DTR-7.4  
Setup  
Setup  
Setup  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select the sub-menu that you want  
to enter and press the Enter but-  
ton.  
Enter  
(upper edge of  
Enter button)  
Enter  
Up  
Each sub-menu has different settings  
that can be changed as desired, and they  
are all explained in the pages that follow.  
To change a setting, first select it using  
(lower edge of  
Enter button)  
Enter  
Down  
Enter  
the  
and cursor buttons, and then  
(left edge of  
Enter button)  
Enter  
Left  
change the setting using the  
cursor buttons.  
and  
(right edge of  
Enter button)  
Enter  
Enter  
Right  
Enter  
Enter  
Enter  
Enter  
Press the Setup button to exit the  
Setup Menu.  
6
Press the Return button to set the new  
settings and return to the previous menu.  
Return  
Return  
Return  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Appropriate Setting forYour Connections  
If you want to perform these operations using the remote  
controller, first press the scroll wheel.  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
Display the main menu.  
Return  
1
2
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
On  
1
Standby  
Press the Setup button on the front panel, or press  
the scroll wheel and then press the Setup button  
on the remote controller to display the main menu  
on the monitor and front display.  
TV  
Clear  
Input  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
DTR-7.4  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Input  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
“0. Hardware Setup” and then press the  
Enter button.  
TV  
Input  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
Setup/Enter/Return/  
Cursor  
/
/
/
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
an item and then press the Enter button.  
3
4
Hardware Setup  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
In this section, you will perform the initial settings for  
the following scenarios.  
• When the impedances for speakers connected to the  
DTR-7.4 are between 4 and 6 (See page 18).  
• When connecting speakers to the ZONE 2  
SPEAKERS terminals (See page 66).  
an item and then use the  
and  
cursor  
buttons to set the desired value.  
Press the Setup button to exit the Setup  
menu.  
Press the Return button to return to the previous  
menu.  
5
• When operating the remote controller using the IR IN  
terminal (See page 69).  
• When you want to fix the TV Format setting to PAL or  
NTSC (Australian model only).  
Speaker Impedance Sub-menu  
Use this sub-menu to set the impedance level of the  
DTR-7.4 to match the specifications of the speakers you  
are using.  
Note:  
The settings within the Hardware Setup Menu will need  
to be made before you use your DTR-7.4 for the first  
time. Once you have selected one of the Hardware Setup  
menu items, the setting will not be displayed again when  
you enter the Basic Menu. To change the setting at a later  
date, select theAdvanced Menu to display the Hardware  
Setup Menu.  
0-1.Speaker Impedance  
a.Minimum  
:6 ohms  
Advanced Menu  
Quit:[SETUP]  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
0.Hardware Setup  
2.Input Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
4.Preference  
1.Speaker Impedance  
2.Surr Back/Zone2  
3.Remote Setup  
4.TV Format  
5.Network Setup  
a. Minimum  
Basic Menu  
6 ohms (default): Select when the impedances of all  
speakers are between 6 and 16 .  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
4 ohms: Select when the impedance of even one  
speaker is between 4 and 6 .  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
Note:  
Before you change this setting, be sure to first lower the  
volume at the DTR-7.4 to the minimum level.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Appropriate Setting forYour Connections—Continued  
Surr Back/Zone 2 Sub-menu  
Remote Setup Sub-menu  
Use this sub-menu when you have a remote control  
sensor connected to the IR IN terminal. The setting in  
this sub-menu tells the DTR-7.4 whether the remote  
control sensor is being used for operation of the  
DTR-7.4 in the main zone or the remote zone (Zone 2).  
0-2.Surr Back/Zone2  
a.Surr Back/Zone2  
:Zone2  
0-3.Remote Setup  
Quit:[SETUP]  
a.Position  
b.Remote ID  
:Main  
:1  
a. Surr Back/Zone 2  
Zone 2: Select when connecting the speakers for the  
remote zone (Zone 2) to the SURR BACK/ZONE 2  
PRE OUT or SURR BACK/ZONE 2 SPEAKERS  
terminals (for using the internal amplifier for Zone 2).  
Surr Back (default): Select when not connecting  
the speakers for the remote zone (Zone 2) to the  
SURR BACK/ZONE 2 PRE OUT or SURR BACK/  
ZONE 2 SPEAKERS terminals (for using the inter-  
nal amplifier for the surround back speakers).  
Quit:[SETUP]  
a. Position  
Main: Select when you are using the remote control  
sensor for operation with the remote controller in the  
main zone.  
Zone 2: Select when you are using the remote  
control sensor for operation with the remote  
controller in the remote zone (Zone 2).  
Note:  
The SURR BACK/ZONE 2 PRE OUT and SURR  
BACK/ZONE 2 SPEAKER terminals  
b. Remote ID  
In order to have 7.1 channel playback in the main room,  
you must set the Surr Back/Zone 2 setting to “Surr  
Back.” When set to “Surr Back,” the surround back  
signals are output from the SURR BACK/ZONE 2 PRE  
OUT and SURR BACK/ZONE 2 SPEAKER terminals.  
Connect the surround back speakers to the SURR  
BACK/ZONE 2 SPEAKER terminals or to the speakers  
terminals of the power amplifier connected to the SURR  
BACK/ZONE 2 PRE OUT terminals.  
This section explains how to change the DTR-7.4’s  
remote control ID.You may need to change this if the  
DTR-7.4’s remote controller interferes with other  
Integra/Onkyo components located in the same room.  
Note:  
If you change the DTR-7.4’s remote control ID, be  
sure to select the same ID on the remote controller  
(See the next section). The default ID for both the  
DTR-7.4 and remote controller is 1.  
When you are not using the surround back speakers in the  
main room and are using the internal amplifier to power the  
speakers for the remote zone (Zone 2), set the Surr Back/  
Zone 2 setting to are “Zone 2.” When set to “Zone 2,” the  
Zone 2 signals are output from the SURR BACK/ZONE 2  
PRE OUT and SURR BACK/ZONE 2 SPEAKER  
terminals. Connect the remote zone (Zone 2) speakers to  
the SURR BACK/ZONE 2 SPEAKER terminals or to the  
speaker terminals of the power amplifier connected to the  
SURR BACK/ZONE 2 PRE OUT terminals.  
At this time, the main room is switched to 5.1 channel  
playback mode, and therefore you cannot select the THX  
Surround EX, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES, which  
requires the surround back speakers.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Appropriate Setting forYour Connections—Continued  
Changing the Remote Controller’s Control ID  
Speaker Setup  
This section explains how to change the remote control-  
After you have installed the DTR-7.4, connected all the  
ler’s ID. You may need to change this if the DTR-7.4’s  
components, and determined the speaker layout, it is  
remote controller interferes with other Integra/Onkyo  
now time to perform the settings in the Speaker Setup  
components located in the same room.  
Menu to optimize the sound acoustics for your  
environment and speaker layout.  
Note:  
If you change the remote controller’s ID, be sure to select  
Before you perform the following settings, it is  
the same ID on the DTR-7.4. For details on setting up the  
important that you first determine the following items:  
DTR-7.4’s remote control ID, refer to the previous  
• The types and sizes of the speakers that are connected.  
“Remote Setup Sub-menu” section. The default ID for  
• The distance from each speaker to the normal  
both the DTR-7.4 and remote controller is 1.  
listening position.  
Hold down the remote controller’s  
Custom button for more than three  
1
Monitor  
Custom  
seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Front  
Left  
Front  
Right  
SW  
Center  
[
[
]
]
m/ft  
m/ft  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“SETUP” menu, and then press  
the scroll wheel.  
[
]
m/ft  
[
]
m/ft  
2
3
4
SL  
SR  
[
]
[
]
m/ft  
m/ft  
[
]
[
]
m/ft  
Roll the scroll wheel to select ID  
menu, and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
m/ft  
SBL  
SBR  
Basic Menu  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
1.Speaker Config  
Roll the scroll wheel to select an  
ID—1 (default), 2, or 3—and then  
press the scroll wheel.  
Advanced Menu  
2.Speaker Distance  
3.Level Calibration  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
Select the same ID as that set on the  
DTR-7.4.  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
If you want to perform these operations using the remote  
controller, first press the scroll wheel.  
TV Format Sub-menu  
Display the main menu.  
1
a. TV Format (Australian model only)  
Press the Setup button on the front panel, or press  
the scroll wheel and then press the Setup button  
on the remote controller to display the main menu  
on the monitor and front display.  
When you want to reconfigure the settings conforming to the  
television format used for the area where you use the DTR-7.4,  
use this sub-menu so that no time is wasted on detection.  
Auto: This is the default setting. When you leave  
this setting unchanged, the television format is  
detected and automatically set by the DTR-7.4.  
PAL: Use this setting when you know that the televi-  
sion format is PAL.  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
1. Speaker Setupand then press the  
Enter button.  
2
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.  
NTSC: Use this setting when you know that the tele-  
vision format is NTSC.  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
an item and then press the Enter button.  
3
0-4.TV Format  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
4
a.TV Format  
:Auto  
an item and then use the  
and  
cursor  
buttons to set the desired value.  
Press the Setup button to exit the Setup  
menu.  
5
Quit:[SETUP]  
Press the Return button to return to the previous  
menu.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Appropriate Setting forYour Connections—Continued  
Speaker Config Sub-menu  
• If “Small” is selected for the Surround setting,  
“Large” cannot be selected for this setting.  
• If the Surr Back/Zone 2 setting in the Surr Back/  
Zone 2 Sub-menu of the Hardware Setup Menu is  
set to “Zone 2,” this setting cannot be selected.  
Use this sub-menu to enter which speakers are  
connected and the size of each speaker.  
For your reference to speaker size settings, if the diameter  
of your speaker unit is larger than 6-1/2” (16 cm), use the  
“Large” setting; otherwise use the “Small” setting.  
f. Crossover  
This setting allows you to set the crossover frequency for  
your speaker system. The crossover frequency is the  
minimum frequency delivered to a speaker and can be  
set to 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (THX), 100 Hz, 120 Hz, or  
150 Hz.  
Select “80Hz (THX)” if you are using aTHX-certified  
speaker system. This setting is valid when “Subwoofer”  
is set to “Yes,” or for speakers that are set to “Small,” at  
the “Speaker Config” menu. Frequencies below this are  
cut from speakers set to “Small” and sent to the  
subwoofer (or to speakers set to “Large”).  
Cone diameter  
1-1.Speaker Config  
a.Subwoofer  
b.Front  
:Yes  
:Small  
:Small  
:Small  
:Small  
Note:  
c.Center  
d.Surround  
e.Surr Back  
f.Crossover:80Hz(THX)  
When “Large” is set, the complete frequency range for  
that speaker channel will be output. When “Small” is set,  
the frequencies below 80 Hz for that speaker channel are  
output to the subwoofer. If Subwoofer is set to “No” in  
the 1-1. Speaker Config Sub-menu, then they will be  
output to the left and right front speakers.  
Quit:[SETUP]  
a. Subwoofer  
Set all speakers for THX speaker systems to “small.”  
Yes: Select when a subwoofer is connected.  
No: Select when a subwoofer is not connected.  
Speaker Distance Sub-menu  
b. Front  
Use this sub-menu to enter the distance from each  
speaker to the normal listening position.  
Large: Select if the front speakers are large sized.  
Small: Select if the front speakers are small sized.  
• If “No” is selected for the Subwoofer setting, this  
setting is fixed to “Large.”  
Notes:  
• Speakers that you selected “No” or “None” for in the  
Speaker Config Sub-menu cannot be selected in this  
sub-menu.  
• The difference between the distances of different  
speakers cannot be set to more than 20 feet (6 meters).  
c. Center  
None: Select if no center speaker is connected.  
Large: Select if the center speaker is large sized.  
Small: Select if the center speaker is small sized.  
• If “Small” is selected for the Front setting, “Large”  
cannot be selected for this setting.  
1-2.Speaker Distance  
a.Unit  
:feet  
b.Left  
:12.0ft  
:12.0ft  
:12.0ft  
c.Center  
d.Right  
d. Surround  
e.Surr Right : 7.0ft  
f.Surr Back R : 7.0ft  
g.Surr Back L : 7.0ft  
None: Select if no surround left and right speakers  
are connected.  
Large: Select if the surround left and right speakers  
are large sized.  
h.Surr Left  
i.Subwoofer  
: 7.0ft  
:12.0ft  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Small: Select if the surround left and right speakers  
are small sized.  
• If “Small” is selected for the Front setting, “Large”  
cannot be selected for this setting.  
a. Unit  
feet: Select if you will enter the distances in feet.  
meters: Select if you will enter the distances in meters.  
e. Surr Back  
b. Left  
None: Select if no surround back left and right  
speakers are connected.  
Large: Select if the surround back left and right  
speakers are large sized.  
Small: Select if the surround back left and right  
speakers are small sized.  
Set the distance from the front left speaker to your  
normal listening position. This can be set between 1 and  
30 feet in 0.5 feet increments (between 0.3 and 9 meters  
in 0.15 meter increments).  
c. Center  
Set the distance from the center speaker to your normal  
listening position. This can be set between 1 and 30 feet  
in 0.5 feet increments (between 0.3 and 9 meters in  
0.15 meter increments).  
• If “None” is selected for the Surround setting, this  
setting cannot be selected.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Appropriate Setting forYour Connections—Continued  
d. Right  
• These settings cannot be made when the sound is  
muted, when you connect the headphones, and when  
you use multichannel playback.  
Set the distance from the front right speaker to your  
normal listening position. This can be set between 1 and  
30 feet in 0.5 feet increments (between 0.3 and 9 meters  
in 0.15 meter increments).  
You cannot use the Master Volume dial while you  
perform the Level Calibration settings. These settings  
are inteded to bring sound levels between speakers  
into balance so as to obtain the proper sound space.  
• This unit supports the THX format and the test tone is  
output at a standard 0 dB (the Absolute Volume value  
is 82). If you usually enjoy listening at a lower level  
than the test tone, be careful of the test tone’s  
sudden big sound. Note that the test tone will be  
output immediately after pressing the Enter button in  
step 1 below.  
e. Surr Right  
Set the distance from the surround right speaker to your  
normal listening position. This can be set between 1 and  
30 feet in 0.5 feet increments (between 0.3 and 9 meters  
in 0.15 meter increments).  
f. Surr Back R  
Set the distance from the surround back right speaker to  
your normal listening position. This can be set between  
1 and 30 feet in 0.5 feet increments (between 0.3 and 9  
meters in 0.15 meter increments).  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
1
g. Surr Back L  
3. Level Calibrationon the sub menu  
and then press the Enter button.  
The “Level Calibration” menu appears.  
You will hear a pink noise from the front left  
speaker.At this time, the volume of the pink noise  
will automatically increase to a predetermined  
reference level (82).  
Set the distance from the surround back left speaker to  
your normal listening position. This can be set between  
1 and 30 feet in 0.5 feet increments (between 0.3 and 9  
meters in 0.15 meter increments).  
Note:  
If the Surr Back/Zone 2 setting in the Surr Back/Zone 2  
Sub-menu of the Hardware Setup Menu is set to “Zone  
2,” then the Surr Back R and Surr Back L settings will  
not be displayed.  
Note:  
Speakers for which you selected “No” or “None”  
in the “Speaker Config” menu will be disabled.  
h. Surr Left  
Set the distance from the surround left speaker to your  
normal listening position. This can be set between 1 and  
30 feet in 0.5 feet increments (between 0.3 and 9 meters  
in 0.15 meter increments).  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
Left.”  
2
Remember the volume level of this noise and then  
press the cursor button. (Note that this can be  
adjusted to any level between –12 and +12  
decibels in 1 decibel increments. For subwoofer,  
values between –15 and +12 dB can be set.) The  
DTR-7.4 will now emit the pink noise from the  
center speaker.  
i. Subwoofer  
Set the distance from the subwoofer to your normal  
listening position. This can be set between 1 and 30 feet  
in 0.5 feet increments (between 0.3 and 9 meters in 0.15  
meter increments).  
Level Calibration Sub-menu  
Using the  
and  
cursor buttons,  
3
Use this sub-menu to set the volume for each speaker so  
that each volume is heard by the listener at the same  
level. This is especially important for speaker layouts  
where the left and right speakers are at different dis-  
tances or in asymmetrical positions due to room designs  
and configurations. These settings and the distance set-  
tings performed in the Speaker Distance Sub-menu are  
vital for creating proper sound space and dynamics.  
adjust the volume level of the noise from  
the center speaker so that it is at the same  
level as that emitted from the front left  
speaker.  
You can go back and forth between the speakers  
to help you compare the volume levels.  
Press the  
cursor button again.  
4
5
The DTR-7.4 will now emit the pink noise from  
the front right speaker.  
1-3.Level Calibration  
a.Left  
: 0dB  
: 0dB  
: 0dB  
: 0dB  
b.Center  
c.Right  
Repeat steps (3) and (4) above for the  
front right and other speakers until all  
speakers are adjusted to the same volume  
level.  
d.Surr Right  
e.Surr Back R : 0dB  
f.Surr Back L : 0dB  
g.Surr Left  
h.Subwoofer  
: 0dB  
: 0dB  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Notes:  
• Speakers for which you selected “No” or “None” in  
the Speaker Config Sub-menu cannot be selected.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Appropriate Setting  
forYour Connections—Continued  
Conguring Input  
Settings Suitable for  
Your Connections  
• To accurately set the output levels, it is recommended  
to use a handheld sound pressure level (SPL) meter.  
Set the meter to C-weighting and slow averaging. A  
These input settings should be made so that the  
DTR-7.4 is optimized for your connections. If the  
default settings suit your connections, you do not need  
to change any settings.  
®
Radio Shack SPL meter or equivalent is  
recommended. Using the internal channel noise  
generators, set each channel so that you read a 75  
decibel sound pressure level.  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
CH SEL  
Level –  
Repeat  
Pure  
A-B  
Search  
DSP  
Memory  
DSP  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
A
Direct  
Standby  
-
Level  
+
Return  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Album  
Level  
Test Tone  
Level +  
Preset  
Playlist  
Artist  
Genre  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
L
Night  
Re-EQ  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
Caps  
Language  
Location  
Phones  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
-
RC 550M  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DTR-7.4  
Using the remote controller  
Tape  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the Test Tone button.  
A pink noise will be emitted from the  
front left speaker.  
1
To Change the Display of the Input  
Source from TAPE to MD  
At this time, the volume of the pink noise  
will automatically increase to a  
predetermined reference level (0 dB).  
If you connected an MD recorder to the TAPE jack on  
the DTR-7.4, you can have “MD” appear when the Tape  
source button is pressed.  
Test Tone  
Remember the volume level of this  
noise and then press the CH SEL  
button.  
The DTR-7.4 will now emit the pink  
noise from the center speaker.  
DTR-7.4  
Press and hold down the Tape  
source button on the DTR-7.4 until  
the display changes from TAPE to  
MD (approx. 3 seconds).  
2
3
Tape  
CH SEL  
Using the Level /+ buttons, adjust  
the volume level of the noise from  
the center speaker so that it is at  
the same level as that emitted from  
the front left speaker.  
-
+
Level  
Level  
To return the display to its original  
setting, perform the same procedure.  
Use the CH SEL and Level /+ but-  
tons to select other speakers and  
adjust the volumes until all speak-  
ers are adjusted to the same level.  
4
5
Press theTestTone button to com-  
plete the procedure.  
Test Tone  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conguring Input Settings Suitable forYour Connections—Continued  
Use the Up/Down  
select 2. Input Setup,and then  
press the Enter button.  
/
buttons to  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
3
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
T
uning  
Standby  
Return  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Enter  
Clear  
Phones  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
The Input Setup menu appears.  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DTR-7.4  
Input source buttons  
Enter  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
1
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Use the Up/Down  
select an item and then press the  
Enter button.  
/
buttons to  
4
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Scroll wheel  
Input  
Sleep  
Input  
Dimmer  
Enter  
TV  
Input  
+
Setup/Enter/  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
Return/Cursor  
/
/
/
Input Setup  
Enter  
If the default input settings do not suit your connec-  
tions, perform the following procedures to configure  
your input settings.  
The settings made in this menu are valid for the input  
source that is currently selected with the input source  
buttons on the front panel and, therefore, these settings  
are made separately for each input source.  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select an item and then use the  
5
6
Enter  
and  
cursor buttons to set the  
desired value.  
For details on the Input Setup settings when Net Audio  
is selected as the input source, see page 78.  
Press the Setup button to exit the  
Setup menu.  
Basic Menu  
Press the Return button to return to the  
previous menu.  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
1.Digital Setup  
2.Multichannel Setup  
3.Video Setup  
4.Character Input  
5.IntelliVolume  
Advanced Menu  
Digital Setup Sub-menu (When NET AUDIO, FM, or  
AM is NOT selected as the input source)  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
This sub-menu concerns the input of digital signals  
from input sources and if these settings are incorrectly  
made, the digital audio signals may not be properly out-  
put, or not heard at all. This sub-menu cannot be  
selected if the selected input source button is AM, FM,  
or Net Audio. It is not accessible if “Yes” is selected in  
2-2. Multichannel Setup Sub-menu and “Multichannel”  
is selected in the Audio Selector. Furthermore, Video 5  
is fixed to the optical digital terminal on the front panel.  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
The illustrations used here represent the remote  
controller. When you perform the procedures on the  
DTR-7.4, use the corresponding buttons on the front  
panel.  
Press the Input button, and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source.  
Input  
1
2-1.Digital Setup  
Input:DVD  
a.Digital Input  
:COAX1  
b.Digital Format  
:All  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the Setup button.  
2
Quit:[SETUP]  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conguring Input Settings Suitable forYour Connections—Continued  
Initial settings for each input source  
• If a DTS signal is not input when “DTS” is selected,  
the DTR-7.4 will not automatically switch to analog  
output even though “Auto” is selected with the Audio  
Selector button.  
Input source  
CD  
Digital input  
OPT 1  
----  
PHONO  
TUNER  
TAPE  
Notes on DTS:  
• If you play a DTS-formatted CD or LD when the  
“PCM” setting is selected on the DTR-7.4, the DTS  
encoded signal will not be decoded and noise will be  
output. This noise could damage the amplifier and  
speakers. Therefore, be sure to select “All” or “DTS”  
and use the digital input jacks (OPTICAL or COAX-  
IAL) to connect the DTS source.  
• If you play a DTS-formatted CD or LD when “All” is  
selected, you may hear a noise for a short while until  
the DTS decoder recognizes the DTS-encoded signal  
and starts operating. This is not a malfunction.  
• If you press the pause or skip button on the player  
while playing a DTS source, a short noise may be  
heard. This is not a malfunction. In such cases, try  
playing the source with the “DTS” selected.  
• The DTS indicator on the DTR-7.4 lights while a  
DTS source is played. When playback finishes and  
the DTS signal transmission stops, the DTR-7.4  
remains in DTS mode and the DTS indicator remains  
lit. This prevents noise when you operate the pause or  
skip button on the player. Therefore, if the source is  
immediately switched from DTS to PCM, the PCM  
signal may not be played. In this case, stop the play-  
back of the source on the player for about three sec-  
onds and then resume playback.  
You may not be able to play some DTS source signals  
from certain CD players and LD players even when  
you connect the player to the DTR-7.4 digitally. This  
is because the digital signal has been processed (such  
as the output level, sampling frequency, or frequency  
response) and the DTR-7.4 cannot recognize the sig-  
nal as DTS data. Therefore you may hear noise when  
you play a DTS source while processing the signal.  
• The outputs for the VIDEO 1 OUT, VIDEO 2 OUT,  
TAPE OUT, and ZONE 2 OUT output analog audio  
signals. Do not record from CDs or LDs that support  
DTS using these outputs. If you do, the DTS-encoded  
signal will be recorded as noise.  
OPT 2  
COAX 2  
COAX 3  
OPT 3  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
VIDEO 5  
DVD  
----  
FRONT (fixed)  
COAX 1  
NET AUDIO  
----: Available for digital input but not set in initial settings.  
: Not available for digital input.  
a. Digital Input  
This setting tells the DTR-7.4 which input source button  
on the front panel is connected with which digital input  
jack on the rear panel.  
For example, if the input source selected at the front  
panel is CD and the compact disc player is connected to  
DIGITAL IN OPT 1, then select “OPT1” here. If the  
input source selected is not connected to a digital input,  
then select “----.”  
OPT1-3: Select if the input source is connected to  
any of the DIGITAL IN OPT jacks 1 through 3.  
COAX1-3: Select if the input source is connected to  
any of the DIGITAL IN COAX jacks 1 through 3.  
----: Select if the input source is not from a digital  
input jack.  
b. Digital Format  
Sets the digital signal to type given priority during sig-  
nal detection at the selected digital terminal.  
The default setting is “All.” If “----” is selected for this  
input source at the Digital Input setting, then this setting  
cannot be selected. Although you can use this default  
setting as is, you may change it as desired depending on  
the input signal format or if you know that you will  
always be listening to a certain input signal format from  
a particular input source.  
All: The digital signal suitable for the input signal  
will be preceded for playback. When there is no dig-  
ital signal input, analog signal will be played.  
DTS: Select this if you play DTS-formatted CD in  
“All” mode and hear noise during fast-forward or  
rewind operation. Non-DTS sound input will not be  
output.  
PCM: Select this if you hear sound gap between  
PCM tracks such as ones on CD in “All” mode. Non-  
PCM sound input will not be output.  
Notes:  
• When you play DTS-formatted CD or LD, be sure to  
select “All” or “DTS.” If you select “PCM,” noise will  
be heard.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conguring Input Settings Suitable forYour Connections—Continued  
Multichannel Setup Sub-menu (When NET AUDIO  
is not selected as the input source)  
Video Setup Sub-menu  
When the default input settings does not suit your con-  
nection, perform the following procedures to configure  
your input settings.  
When any input source other than Net Audio is selected,  
this sub-menu appears and allows you to set the multi-  
channel input setting.  
2-3.Video Setup  
Input:DVD  
The setting in this sub-menu is normally set to “No,”  
and only needs to be changed to “Yes” if a DVD player,  
MPEG decoder, or other component that has a multi-  
channel port is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT  
port for 5.1 channel, 6.1 channel, or 7.1 channel audio.  
The default setting for “DVD” is set to “Yes” and the  
one for other input sources is set to “No.” When the ana-  
log output from a DVD player is not connected to the  
MULTI CH INPUT port, change this setting to “No.”  
For details on the device connection and setting proce-  
dures, see “Enjoying analog multichannel audio play-  
back” on page 64.  
a.Video  
:DVD  
b.Component Video  
:INPUT1  
Quit:[SETUP]  
a. Video  
This setting allows you to match the audio from one  
component with the video from another. Therefore, you  
can set a video source to be displayed while the audio  
from another input source is heard. For example, this  
allows you to play the music from a compact disc, while  
displaying the picture from a video cassette player or  
other video source.  
2-2.Multichannel Setup  
Input:DVD  
a.Multichannel :Yes  
The default settings are given below.  
Input source selected  
CD  
Video  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
DVD  
PHONO  
TUNER  
Input source selected  
CD  
Multichannel  
TAPE  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
DVD  
PHONO  
TUNER  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
VIDEO 5  
NET AUDIO  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
VIDEO 5  
Last Valid  
TAPE  
DVD  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
VIDEO 5  
The settings in this sub-menu apply to the video and S  
video signals. Available options for the video source to  
be displayed are “DVD,” “VIDEO 1” to “VIDEO 5,”  
“Last Valid” and “----.”  
DVD, VIDEO 1-5: Select either the video signal from  
the VIDEO or S VIDEO terminal for each video input.  
Last Valid: Select to have the video of the previous  
input source continued. For example, if the selected  
input source is VIDEO 1, and you then change to CD  
(set to “Last Valid”), then the audio from the CD input  
is played while the video from VIDEO 1 continues.  
----: Set this option when you do not want any video  
inputs to be displayed.  
b. Component Video  
Use this setting if you connect monitors like TV to the  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks on the  
DTR-7.4.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conguring Input Settings Suitable forYour Connections—Continued  
The default settings are given below.  
Input source selected  
CD  
Component video input  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
INPUT 1  
PHONO  
TUNER  
TAPE  
DVD  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
VIDEO 5  
NET AUDIO  
INPUT 2  
INPUT 2  
INPUT 2  
INPUT 2  
INPUT 2  
Last Valid  
For example, when you connect the DVD player to the  
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT 2 jacks, select “DVD”  
as input source and set “b. Component Video” to  
“INPUT 2.”  
Available component video inputs are “INPUT 1,”  
“INPUT 2,” “VIDEO,” “Last Valid,” and “None.”  
INPUT 1: The video signals from devices connected to  
the INPUT 1 of the COMPONENT VIDEO input banks  
are used.  
INPUT 2: The video signals from devices connected to  
the INPUT 2 of the COMPONENT VIDEO input banks  
are used.  
VIDEO: The video signals assigned in the “a. Video”  
sub-menu setting are used. This option is useful when  
no devices are connected to the INPUT 1 and INPUT 2  
of the COMPONENT VIDEO input banks.  
Last Valid (enables the source last selected): Select to  
have the video of the previous input source continued.  
None: No video signals are assigned. When you select  
“None,” the OSD screen disappears. If you want to  
change this setting later on, use the front panel display  
on the DTR-7.4.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Music or Videos with the DTR-7.4  
Though the DTR-7.4 is often used to listen to the radio,  
it does not show you its true ability until it is used to play  
Adjust the volume.  
Adjusting the main volume adjusts the vol-  
3
DTR-7.4  
music or watch videos, DVDs, and the like. The  
DTR-7.4 has the latest state-of-the-art features to play  
back today’s technologies with the utmost in fidelity and  
power. From a two-speaker system to a seven-speaker  
system, you are assured a sound space that you can  
always enjoy.  
ume level of all the speakers connected to  
the DTR-7.4 together. If headphones are  
connected, this also adjusts the volume  
heard from the headphone speakers. To  
adjust the volume, either press theVOL  
buttons on the remote controller or turn the  
Master Volume dial. To increase the vol-  
ume, turn the dial clockwise; to decrease  
the volume, turn the dial counterclockwise.  
The volume can be set from 0 to 100 (or  
, –81 to +18 dB).  
Master Volume  
To ensure the proper sound space, you must first per-  
form the speaker setup settings. These settings allow  
you to set the type of speakers you are using, the dis-  
tance they are located from the listening position, and  
the individual speaker volumes. For more details, see  
Speaker Setup sub-menu of the Setup Menu on pages  
32-35.  
Remote  
controller  
VOL  
Hint:  
The DTR-7.4 is designed for home the-  
ater environment and has wider volume  
range enabling fine volume adjustment.  
This allows you to set the volume at  
your preferred level easily.  
Dimmer  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
Standby  
Return  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
Phones  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DTR-7.4  
Temporarily turning off the sound  
Use the Muting button to temporarily turn off the sound  
immediately.  
Phones  
Input source buttons  
Master Volume  
4
5
6
-
Remote  
controller  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the Muting button on the  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
remote controller.  
When pressed, “Muting” is displayed on  
the DTR-7.4. Press the Muting button  
again to turn the sound back on.  
Muting  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Input  
Sleep  
Scroll wheel  
Dimmer  
TV  
Sleep  
Input  
Dimmer  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
VOL  
Muting  
-
Display  
Muting  
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
CH SEL  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
A-B  
Pure  
A
Direct  
Listening with headphones  
Test Tone  
Level –/+  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Album  
Level  
-
Level  
+
Playlist  
Artist  
Genre  
To listen with headphones, plug a pair of headphones  
with a standard stereo plug into the Phones jack on the  
DTR-7.4 front panel.  
.
Basic Operation  
If you want to perform these operations using the remote  
controller, first press the scroll wheel.  
Phones  
Zone  
2
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
DVD  
Audio  
Selector  
Press the input source button on  
1
the DTR-7.4 that corresponds to  
the source to which you want to  
listen.  
DTR-7.4  
DVD  
Video  
1
Video  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
When you connect headphones, no sound will be heard  
from the speakers.  
VCR  
1
VCR  
2
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
When the headphones are unplugged, the DTR-7.4  
returns to its original listening mode. When using the  
headphones, you can only use the Direct, Pure Audio,  
Stereo, and Mono listening modes (Available modes can  
vary depending on the current input source).  
If you select MULTI CH INPUT, you will only hear the  
sound output to the front right and left channels.  
The headphone volume level can be adjusted at the Setup  
Menu (See page 63).  
On the remote controller, roll the  
scroll wheel to select the input  
source and remote controller mode.  
Remote  
controller  
Note:  
If neither the Input nor Mode button is  
illuminated, the input source and remote  
controller mode are selected simulta-  
neously. If either button is illuminated,  
press that button first.  
Note:  
Turn on the corresponding com-  
ponent and play the media.  
The signal to the remote zone (Zone 2) will not be  
affected whether or not headphones are connected.  
2
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Music or Videos with the DTR-7.4—Continued  
Temporarily Changing the Speaker Output  
Levels  
Using the Sleep Timer (remote controller only)  
With the sleep timer you can set the DTR-7.4 so that it  
automatically turns off after a set period.  
To change the individual speaker volumes temporarily,  
follow the procedure given below. Each channel can be  
set between –12 and +12 decibels (between –15 and  
+12 decibels for the subwoofer). Note that the speaker  
volumes will return to the original settings when the  
DTR-7.4 is put in the standby state.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the Sleep button repeatedly  
to select the required sleep time.  
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10  
minutes in 10 minute increments.  
The Sleep indicator appears on the dis-  
play when the sleep timer has been set,  
as shown. The specified sleep time  
appears on the display for about five sec-  
onds, then the previous display reap-  
pears.  
Remote  
controller  
Press the scroll wheel.  
1
Sleep  
Press the CH SEL button and  
select the desired speaker.  
2
CH SEL  
To cancel the sleep timer, press the  
Sleep button repeatedly until the Sleep  
indicator disappears.  
To check the remaining sleep time,  
press the Sleep button. Note that if you  
press the Sleep button while the sleep  
time is being displayed, you’ll shorten  
the sleep time by 10 minutes.  
Using the sleep timer only for Zone 2:  
If you are using the remote zone (Zone  
2), it will turn off at the same time as the  
main zone. If you want to set the sleep  
function for Zone 2 only, set the sleep  
function with main zone turned on and  
then put the main zone into the standby  
state.  
Press the Level or + button to  
adjust the volume level.  
3
-
+
Level  
Level  
Notes:  
You cannot select a speaker if it is set to “No” or  
“None” in the Speaker Config Sub-menu of the  
Speaker Setup Menu.  
• To have your new speaker levels set here, overwrite  
the settings at Setup Menu Speaker Setup Menu  
Level Calibration Sub-menu, and press the Test  
Tone button after you complete step 3 in the proce-  
dure above.  
Adjusting the brightness of the front display  
You can adjust the brightness of the front display of the  
DTR-7.4 using the Dimmer button on the remote con-  
troller or on the DTR-7.4 front panel (other than Euro-  
pean models).  
DTR-7.4  
Use the Dimmer button on the  
Dimmer  
DTR-7.4 to select: dim, dimmer, or  
normal brightness.  
Remote  
On the remote controller,press the  
controller  
scroll wheel, and then press the  
Dimmer button.  
Dimmer  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Music or Videos with the DTR-7.4—Continued  
the surround channel number is 1, it is monaural; when  
Display  
it is 0, there is no surround channel. When no LFE num-  
ber is given, there is no LFE channel. Also, if there is no  
program format for the input signal, nothing will be dis-  
played.  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
T
uning  
Standby  
Return  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
Phones  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
When the input signal is linear PCM  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DTR-7.4  
The sampling frequency is displayed. For example, the  
display “PCM fs: 44.1k” shows that the signal is PCM  
and that the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz.  
Audio Selector  
Dialog norm  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
Input  
Dialogue Normalization (Dialog Norm) is a feature of  
Dolby Digital. When playing back software that has  
been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see  
a brief message in the front panel display that reads Dia-  
log Norm xdB (“x” being a numeric value). Dialogue  
Normalization serves to let you know if the source  
material has been recorded at a higher or lower level  
than usual. For example, if you see the message “Dialog  
Norm: +4” in the front panel display, to keep the overall  
output level constant just turn down the volume control  
by 4 dB. In other words, the source material that you  
are listening to has been recorded 4 dB louder than  
usual. If you do not see a message, then no adjustment  
of the volume control is necessary.  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Scroll wheel  
Display  
Input  
Sleep  
Input  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
Display  
Muting  
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
A-B  
Pure  
A
Direct  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
-
Level  
+
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Genre  
Re-EQ  
L
Caps  
Location  
Audio SEL  
-
RC 550M  
Switching the display  
While listening to or watching an input source, you can  
display information regarding the type of source and sig-  
nal being input.  
When FM or AM is selected as the input source:  
(When the station have no name:)  
DTR-7.4  
Press the Display button on the  
DTR-7.4 or the remote controller.  
FM/AMfrequency+  
Preset no.  
ch  
Display  
FM/AM +  
Listening mode  
Remote  
controller  
(When the station have a custom name:)  
Name +  
ch  
Preset no.  
FM/AM +  
Display  
ch  
Frequency +  
Preset no.  
When an input source other than FM or AM is selected:  
Input  
FM/AM +  
Listening mode  
Program format*  
Input +  
Listening mode  
or Multi Ch  
* When the input signal is digital audio  
The program format is displayed. For example, the dis-  
play “Dolby D: 3/2.1” shows that the format is Dolby  
Digital with 5.1 discrete channels consisting of three  
front channels (front left, front right, and center), two  
surround channels (surround left and surround right),  
and the low frequency effect (LFE) channel.  
When the front channel number is 2, they are the front  
left and front right; when it is 1, it is monaural. When  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Music or Videos with the DTR-7.4—Continued  
Changing the audio mode  
The DTR-7.4 accepts analog, digital and multichannel  
signals for audio input. You can choose which kind of  
signal to be played for a specific device.  
Press the Input button, and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
1
Input  
input source you want to set.  
Press the scroll wheel and then  
press the Audio SEL button.  
2
Each time the button is pressed, the mode  
changes from “Auto” “Multich” →  
“Analog” and back to “Auto.” The  
“Auto” audio mode is recommended for  
normal circumstances.  
Audio SEL  
Note:  
This procedure can also be performed by  
using the DTR-7.4’s input source buttons  
and Audio Selector button.  
Auto (automatic detection): With this setting, the  
DTR-7.4 automatically detects whether the input signal  
is digital or analog. When a digital signal is not input,  
then the analog signal is played. This setting only  
appears if a digital input is selected for the Digital Input  
setting at Setup Menu Input Setup Menu Digital  
Setup Sub-menu (See pages 36-37).  
Multich (Multichannel): Select this setting to play back  
the input from the component connected to the MULTI  
CH INPUT port. This setting only appears if “Yes” is  
selected for the Multichannel setting at Setup Menu →  
Input Setup Menu Multichannel Setup Sub-menu  
(See pages 38).  
Analog: Select this setting to play back the input from a  
source component connected to analog audio input  
jacks. With this setting, even if a digital signal is input  
from the same component, only the analog signal will be  
output.  
Adjusting the bass and treble  
You can adjust the bass and treble levels at the Setup  
Menu AudioAdjust Menu Tone Control Sub-menu  
(See page 54). The treble level affects the front left and  
right speakers and the center speaker. The bass level  
affects the front left and right speakers, the center  
speaker, and the subwoofer. For multichannel sources,  
these dials will not work if the tone control is set to  
“Direct” or “Pure Audio.”  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes  
The DTR-7.4’s surround sound enables you to enjoy  
movie theater or concert hall quality sound in your  
home.  
The configuration of the speakers is very important for  
the surround sound effect. Refer to “About Home  
Theater” on page 16.  
Before selecting a listening mode, be sure to complete  
the Speaker Setup (See page 32). Once the parameters  
have been set, it is not necessary to set them again. See  
pages 44-45 for information regarding how to select the  
listening mode.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
As opposed to Dolby Pro Logic, which had four chan-  
nels (front left/right, center, and surround) recorded into  
two channels with matrix processing and then played  
back in four channels, Dolby Pro Logic II uses a feed-  
back logic circuit to have 5.1 channel surround audio  
(Dolby Surround, etc.) matrix-encoded into two chan-  
nels and then played back in its original 5.1 channel  
form.  
Dolby Pro Logic II provides a Movie Mode designed for  
playing movies and a Music Mode designed for listening  
to music.  
In the Movie Mode, the surround channels, which used  
to provide monaural output over only a narrow fre-  
quency range, now provide complete stereo output over  
the full frequency range. The result is movie viewing  
with a realistic feel of movement. This mode can be used  
withVHS and DVD videos with the  
Listening Modes  
Mono  
This mode is for playing old movies where the sound is  
recorded in monaural or for playing the left and right  
channels separately for movies that contain different lan-  
guage signals. This mode also allows you to listen to the  
multiplexed soundtracks on DVDs and other media that  
have them.  
mark and certain television programs.  
The Music Mode uses the surround channels to provide  
a natural soundfield that cannot be provided with normal  
stereo output. This mode can be used with music com-  
pact discs and other stereo sources.  
Pure Audio  
The same as the direct mode except that the pure audio  
mode also turns off the display window, turns off the  
power supply to the video circuitry (resulting in a  
blacked-out screen), and minimizes the sources of noise.  
The result is high-fidelity music playback true to the  
original source.  
Dolby D (Dolby Digital)  
This mode is used for playing Dolby Digital sources.  
Dolby Digital is compressed digital data with a maxi-  
mum of 5.1 channel surround sound. This source signal  
Direct  
comes from DVDs and LDs that have the  
and therefore are recorded for 5.1 channel output.  
• Dolby Digital EX  
mark  
This mode delivers pure sound with minimal sound qual-  
ity adjustment and filtration. The sound recorded for the  
right and left front channels is output to the right and left  
front speakers only and not output to the subwoofer.  
Enabled when playing back sources with surround tracks  
that were encoded using the Surround EX technology.  
Stereo  
DTS Neo:6  
All input sound is output from the left and right front  
speakers.  
The subwoofer is also used for playback.  
This mode is for 6.1 channel playback of sources such as  
PCM or analog sources that have only two channels. The  
outputs of all six channels have a wide frequency range  
with a great separation between the different channels.  
This mode can be set to the Cinema Mode designed for  
playing movies and the Music Mode designed for listen-  
ing to music.  
The Cinema Mode is good for movies. The reproduced  
surround sound provide the same realistic feel of move-  
ment as 6.1 channel sources. This mode can be used with  
VHS and television programs with stereo sound.  
The Music Mode uses the surround channels to provide  
a natural sound space that cannot be provided with nor-  
mal stereo output. This mode can be used with music  
CDs and other stereo sources.  
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)  
For the best enjoyment of your home theater, it is recom-  
mended that you have front left and right speakers, a cen-  
ter speaker, and surround left and right speakers.  
However, if you only have front left and right speakers,  
you can enjoy multichannel audio by using this mode.  
This mode controls the characteristics of the sound that  
reaches each ear to reproduce a multi-speaker setup. To  
receive the full effect, there is an optimum listening posi-  
tion (sweet spot). Refer to the explanation of the listen-  
ing angle. In addition, if the reflective sound components  
are large, it may be difficult to achieve the desired result,  
so be sure to set up your system and listening position to  
minimize reflective sound.  
DTS  
This mode is used for playing DTS sources.  
DTS (Digital Theater System) is compressed digital data  
with a maximum 5.1 channel surround output (6.1 channel  
with DTS-ES Discrete sources) that allows for an  
extremely high-quality sound. This source signal requires a  
DVD player that supports DTS output and comes from  
DVDs, compact discs, and LDs that have the  
mark.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
DTS-ES Discrete  
When released to the home consumer market, mov-  
ies that were created using the Dolby Digital Sur-  
round EX technology, may have a note to that effect  
on the packaging. A list of movies created using this  
technology can be found on the Dolby web site at  
http://www.dolby.com.  
The DTR-7.4 can play the 5.1 channel sources in  
THX surround EX mode, even if the source is not  
encoded in Dolby Digital Surround EX format. In  
this case, the sound actually output from the sur-  
round back channels depends on the source and may  
not fit your tastes.  
With the addition of the surround back channel, this  
new format has all 6.1 channels recorded indepen-  
dently for a completely discrete digital format. Since  
all channels are recorded independently, high-fidel-  
ity surround playback with an increased feeling of a  
separated sound space is achieved.  
• DTS-ES Matrix  
This format has the surround back channel matrix  
encoded and inserted into the left and right surround  
channels so that at playback the output for the left,  
right, and back surround channels are decoded using  
a high-precision matrix decoder.  
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) modes  
• DTS 96/24  
Mono Movie  
Automatically changes to this mode when playing  
back sources with surround tracks that were encoded  
using the DTS 96/24 technology.  
This mode is suitable for playing back monaural record-  
ing such as old movie soundtracks. The center channel  
delivers the unprocessed original sound, whereas the  
other channels deliver the center-channel sound pro-  
cessed with the appropriate reverberation. This allows  
you to enjoy monaural sound with the atmosphere of a  
movie theater.  
THX  
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies  
established by the world-renowned film production com-  
pany, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’  
personal desire to make your experience of the film  
soundtrack, in both movie theaters and in your home the-  
ater, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.  
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters  
called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back  
in movie theaters with similar equipment and conditions.  
This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto  
LD, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for play-  
back in a small home theater environment.  
THX engineers developed patented technologies to  
translate accurately the sound from the movie theater  
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spa-  
tial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX  
indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in  
Cinema Modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).  
• THX Cinema  
Enhance  
This mode reproduces a natural surround environment  
by using seven speaker channels. The sound effects  
move smoothly toward the surround back. This mode is  
good for music and TV sports programs.  
Orchestra  
This mode is appropriate for classical and opera music.  
The center channel is cut and the surround channels are  
emphasized to widen the stereo image. It will simulate  
the natural reverberation that is created in large halls.  
Unplugged  
This mode is suitable for acoustical instrumental sounds,  
vocals, and jazz music. By emphasizing the front stereo  
image, it will simulate the acoustics that you would  
experience in front of the stage.  
Studio-Mix  
This is the conventional 5.1 channel THX format.  
This mode should be used only when playing back  
sources that were mixed for playback in large movie  
theater environments.  
This mode is for rock and popular music. The lively  
sounds are enhanced for a powerful acoustic image that  
simulates the feeling of being at a club or rock concert.  
TV Logic  
• THX Surround EX  
This mode gives realistic acoustics to TV programs that  
are aired from TV studios. It enhances the entire sur-  
round sound and clarity of the conversation.  
“THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX”  
is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the  
THX division of THX Ltd.  
All Ch Stereo  
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been  
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technol-  
ogy are able to reproduce an extra channel which has  
been added during the mixing of the program. This  
channel, called Surround Back, places sounds  
behind the listener in addition to the currently avail-  
able front left, front center, front right, surround  
right, surround left, and subwoofer channels.  
This additional channel provides the opportunity for  
more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings  
more depth, spacious ambience, and sound localiza-  
tion than ever before.  
This mode is designed for playing background music.  
The front, surround, and surround back channels create  
a stereo image that encompasses the entire area.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
On the DTR-7.4, use the Direct/  
Pure Audio, Stereo, Surround,  
3
Direct/Pure Audio, Stereo, Surround, THX, DSP  
/
DTR-7.4  
THX, or DSP  
/
buttons to  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
select a listening mode.  
DSP  
Standby  
Return  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
Phones  
Zone  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
2
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
On the remode controller, press  
the scroll wheel, and then use the  
Surround,THX, All CH ST, Stereo,  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DTR-7.4  
Remote  
controller  
Pure A, Direct, or DSP  
/
but-  
Input source buttons  
tons to select a listening mode.  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
Angle Last Memory  
THX  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
-
A
B
Note:  
Pure  
A
Direct  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
Input  
The available listening modes depend on  
the input signal you selected (For details,  
see “Relationship between input source  
and listening mode” on page 47).  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
10  
Clear  
0
--  
/
---  
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Scroll wheel  
Input  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
Direct/Pure Audio (Direct/Pure A button): Changes  
the listening mode for the signal type that is currently  
being input from the selected input source to the Direct  
listening mode or Pure Audio listening mode. When you  
use the buttons on the DTR-7.4 for this operation, with  
each press of this button, you can switch between Direct  
and Pure Audio.  
When you select “Pure Audio,” the video signal is inter-  
rupted (resulting in a blacked-out screen), and the Pure  
Audio indicator lights up.  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
Display  
Muting  
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
A-B  
Surround, THX,  
All CH ST, Stereo,  
Pure A, Direct, DSP  
Pure  
A
Direct  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
-
Level  
+
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Genre  
Re-EQ  
L
Caps  
Location  
/
-
RC 550M  
Note:  
Selecting the Listening Mode  
When you are using the remote zone (Zone 2), the Pure  
Audio will not work.  
The DTR-7.4 provides various listening modes.  
Stereo button: Changes the listening mode for the sig-  
nal type that is currently being input from the selected  
input source to the Stereo listening mode.  
Select the input source.  
On the DTR-7.4, use the input source  
buttons.  
1
DTR-7.4  
DVD  
Video  
1
Video  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
VCR  
1
VCR  
2
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Surround button: Changes the listening mode for the  
signal type that is currently being input from the selected  
input source to the surround mode that matches the sig-  
nal type (e.g., Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Digital, or  
DTS).  
On the remote controller, roll the  
scroll wheel to select the input  
source and remote controller  
mode.  
Remote  
controller  
Note:  
If the Surround button is pressed  
• While playing back DTS sources  
If neither the Input nor Mode button is  
illuminated, the input source and remote  
controller mode are selected simulta-  
neously. If either button is illuminated,  
press the illuminated button first.  
Switches the DTS-ES setting from: Auto On →  
Off. For details, see “d. DTS-ES” on page 60.  
• While playing back Analog/PCM sources  
Switches from: Pro Logic II Movie Pro Logic II  
Music DTS Neo6:Cinema DTS Neo6:Music.  
For details, see “a. Surr Mode (Analog/PCM)” on  
page 59.  
Start playback on the device you  
selected for input.  
2
• While playing back D.F. 2-channel sources  
Switches from: Pro Logic II Movie Pro Logic II  
Music. For details, see “b. Surr Mode (D.F.2ch)” on  
page 59.  
• While playing back Dolby Digital sources  
Switches the Dolby Digital EX setting from:Auto →  
On Off. For details, see “c. Dolby Digital EX  
(Dolby D)” on page 60.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
THX: Changes the listening mode to the THX listening  
mode.  
Back/Zone 2 Sub-menu is set to “Zone 2,” the THX Sur-  
round EX, DTS-ES Discrete, or DTS-ES Matrix listen-  
ing modes cannot be selected.  
If the THX button is pressed  
• While playing back Dolby Digital sources  
Switches the THX Surround EX mode (Auto On  
Off) if the source is a THX Surround EX-compat-  
ible source. For details, see “c. THX Surround EX  
(Dolby D)” on page 61.  
• While playing back Analog/PCM sources  
Switches the decoding mode (Pro Logic II Movie →  
DTS Neo6:Cinema) for THX processing. For details,  
see “b. Decoder (2ch)” on page 61.  
DSP  
/
: Changes the digital processing mode that is  
currently being input from the selected input source as  
shown below.  
Mono, Theater-Dimensional, Mono Movie, Enhance,  
Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch  
Stereo, Mono.  
The digital processing modes available depend on the  
selected input source.  
All CH ST (remote controller only): Changes toAll Ch  
Stereo the listening mode for the input signal of the input  
source currently selected. If pressed, the corresponding  
setting in the Listening Mode Preset Sub-menu of the  
Setup Menu for the selected input source is also changed  
(See pages 56-57).  
• While playing back DTS sources  
Switches the DTS-ES mode from Auto On Off.  
Changing the DTS-ES mode allows you to enjoy the  
DTS THX Cinema, DTS-ES Discrete THX Cinema,  
and DTS-ES Matrix THX Cinema surround systems.  
For details, see “d. DTS-ES” on page 61.  
On the DTR-7.4, use the DSP button for enabling the All  
Ch Stereo listening mode.  
Be aware that if surround back speakers are not con-  
nected, or if the Surr Back/Zone 2 setting of the Surr  
Relationship between input source and listening mode  
Listening modes marked with the “” can be selected. For columns that list a number of listening modes, the display  
will correspond to the format of the signal from the source media.  
Input source signal (display)  
Analog/PCM (2ch) PCM fs= 96k Dolby Digital  
DTS  
Digital Format  
Digital Format  
(Monaural)  
(2ch)  
(3ch-5.1ch)  
(5.1ch, 6.1ch) (DD/DTS) (2ch)  
Type of software Tape, Video tape,  
DVD  
(96kHz/  
24bit)  
DVD,  
Digital Satellite  
CD, LD,  
DVD  
DVD,  
Digital Satellite  
DVD  
Vinyl, Tuner, CD,  
MD, DVD (Stereo),  
LD, Digital Satellite  
Button/Listening Mode  
Pure A*1  
Direct*1  
Stereo  
Pure Audio  
Direct  
Stereo  
PLII Movie  
PLII Music  
DTS Neo:6 Cinema  
DTS Neo:6 Music  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital EX*2  
DTS  
*3  
DTS 96/24  
*4  
DTS-ES Descrete*2  
*5  
DTS-ES Matrix*2  
DTS-ES + Neo:6  
/
THX Cinema  
THX Surround EX*2  
Mono  
Theater-Dimensional  
Mono Movie  
Enhance  
Orchestra  
Unplugged  
Studio-Mix  
TV Logic  
ALL Ch Stereo  
*1 On the DTR-7.4, use the Direct/Pure Audio button for selecting these listening modes.  
*2 Available only when the surround back speakers are connected to the DTR-7.4.  
*3 Available only when the input source is encoded in the DTS 96/24 format.  
*4 Available only when the input source is encoded in the DTS-ES Discrete format.  
*5 The DTS-ES Matrix listening mode is enabled when the input source is encoded in the DTS-ES Matrix format. When the input source is in  
DTS format but other than 6.1ch, and the surround setting for “DTS-ES” is set to “On,” the DTS-ES+Neo:6 listening mode is enabled.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
One of the features of the DTR-7.4 that is most fre-  
Tuning Into a Radio Station  
quently used is its ability to play FM and AM broadcast  
radio stations. The DTR-7.4 provides a number of listen-  
ing modes perfect for listening to the radio and getting  
the most out of your audio system. Also, by presetting  
radio stations that you listen to frequently, you can select  
them easily by pressing the CH/Disc +/– button on the  
remote controller.  
Press the Tuner input source but-  
ton.  
1
Tuner  
Each time you press the Tuner button, the  
input source changes between AM and  
FM.  
Using theTuning and buttons  
on the front panel, tune into the  
station you desire.  
2
Tuner  
Tuning  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
Standby  
Return  
Tuned in  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
Preset  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
Auto mode  
stereo  
Phones  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DTR-7.4  
Memory  
FM Mode Tuning  
Preset  
/
/
FM STEREO”  
Band  
Frequency  
(Lights red)  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
Input  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
• The tuner frequency changes in 100 kHz (50 kHz)  
increments for FM and 10 kHz (or 9 kHz) increments  
for AM.  
You can press the Tuning or button continuously  
for more than 0.5 seconds to scan for an FM station in  
the direction of the button you pressed (FM auto tun-  
ing mode). After you release the button and a station  
is received in stereo, the scanning stops.  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Scroll wheel  
Input  
Sleep  
Input  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
CH/Disc +/–  
-
Display  
Muting  
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
A-B  
Pure  
A
Direct  
Listening to a stereo radio station (FM mode)  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
-
Level  
+
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Genre  
Re-EQ  
L
Caps  
Location  
When you tune into a radio station,  
-
RC 550M  
Memory  
FM Mode  
TUNED  
indicator appears in the  
Clear  
display. If you tune into an FM station  
in stereo, then “FM STEREO” appears.  
If the signal is weak, it may be impos-  
sible to tune into the station in stereo. In  
such a case, press the FM Mode but-  
ton on the front panel. The AUTO indi-  
cation disappears and the radio station  
is output in the monaural mode. To  
return to stereo, press the FM Mode  
button again. “AUTO” appears. Some  
inter-station noise may be heard, but  
the sound will not cut in and out as it  
would if stereo was selected.  
Specifying Radio Stations by Frequency  
To select a radio station by entering its  
Clear  
frequency, press the remote controller’s  
Direct Tu
Direct Tuning button, and then use the  
number buttons to enter the frequency.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts—Continued  
Selecting a preset radio station  
Presetting a Radio Station  
When using the DTR-7.4:  
Up to 40 stations can be stored in memory as preset radio  
stations.  
Press Tuner input source button  
on the DTR-7.4.  
1
Tuner  
Tune into the radio station you  
1
The front display should show the cur-  
rently selected frequency.  
desire (See Tuning Into a Radio  
Station).  
Press the Preset  
select the number of the desired  
preset station.  
/
buttons and  
2
Tuning  
Press the Memory button on the  
front panel.  
2
Preset  
Memory  
FM Mode  
r  
Flashes  
When using the remote controller:  
ch  
Press the Input button, and then  
1
2
use the scroll wheel to selectTuner  
(press the scroll wheel to select  
FM or AM).  
Input  
Using the Preset  
select a preset number (from 1 to  
40) to assign the station.  
/
buttons,  
3
Tuning  
Preset  
Press the Memory button to nal-  
ize the procedure.  
4
Use the CH/Disc +/button to  
select the presets.  
Memory  
FM Mode  
+
r  
Lights  
CH  
Disc  
-
ch  
You can enter text names for any of the  
preset radio stations (See page 52).  
Selecting Presets by Number  
To select a preset by number, use the remote controller’s  
number buttons. For example, to select preset #7, press  
[7]. To select preset #12, press [1] then [2].  
Erasing a preset radio station  
Press the Tuner input source but-  
1
ton and press the Preset  
/
but-  
Tuner  
tons to select the preset radio  
station that you want to erase (See  
above).  
ch  
Tuning  
Preset  
Press and hold the Memory button  
and then press the FM Mode but-  
ton.  
2
Memory  
FM Mode  
Clear  
The selected preset station is erased.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording a Source  
instruction manual that came with your digital record-  
ing equipment (e.g., MD recorder or DAT deck) to  
know what restrictions are imposed.  
Input source buttons  
Rec Out  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
Standby  
You cannot record the source connected to the MULTI  
CH INPUT connector.  
• When listening to music in the remote zone, you can  
record the music or video that is being played in the  
main zone.  
Return  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
Phones  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DTR-7.4  
• If you select FM (or AM) with the Tuner input source  
button when the recording source is set to AM (or  
FM), the output for the recording source also changes  
to AM (or FM).  
To Record the Input Source Signal  
You are CurrentlyWatching/Listening  
This method outputs to the audio and video outputs the  
currently selected input source signal. This method  
allows you to record a signal while you are actually lis-  
tening to or watching it.  
To Record an Input Source Signal  
Different from thatYou are Currently  
Watching/Listening  
Select the input source to record  
by pressing the corresponding  
input source button.  
Follow the procedure given below to record an input  
source signal different from that which you are listening  
to or watching at the time of recording.  
1
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
1
2
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
The input source is now selected and you  
may watch or listen to it as desired.  
Rec Out  
Press the Rec Out button.  
1
Press the Rec Out button repeat-  
edly until Rec Sel:SOURCE”  
appears in the front display.  
The signal from the currently selected  
input source is now output to the TAPE  
OUT, VIDEO 1 OUT, VIDEO 2 OUT  
outputs for recording.  
2
3
Within 8 seconds, press the input  
source selector button of the input  
source signal that you wish to record.  
The signal from the selected input source  
is now output to the TAPE OUT, VIDEO  
1 OUT, and VIDEO 2 OUT outputs for  
recording.  
2
Rec Out  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
1
2
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Start recording at the recording  
component as desired.  
To confirm the settings, press the Rec  
Out button. The current settings will  
appear for 8 seconds in the front display.  
Start recording at the recording  
component as desired.  
To confirm the settings, press the Rec  
Out button. The current settings will  
appear for 8 seconds in the front display.  
3
Rec Out  
Rec Out  
Notes:  
Notes:  
• If you change the input source during recording, you will  
record the signals from the newly selected input source.  
You cannot record the surround effects.  
• Be aware that the remote (Zone 2) and recording  
(REC OUT) outputs use the same circuit and therefore  
cannot be used at the same time.  
• Digital signals input to the DIGITAL IN (COAX) and  
DIGITAL IN (OPT) inputs will be output to the DIG-  
ITAL OUT (OPT) output. However, MP3, WMA,  
WAVE (PCM), and other music formats played using  
Net Audio are only output as analog audio.  
• Digital input signals are only output to the digital out-  
puts and analog input signals are only output from the  
analog outputs. There is no conversion from digital to  
analog or vice versa. When connecting CD players  
and other digital components, do not connect only the  
digital terminals, but the analog ones as well.  
You cannot record the surround effects.  
• Digital signals input to the DIGITAL IN (COAX) and  
DIGITAL IN (OPT) inputs will be output to the DIG-  
ITAL OUT (OPT) outputs.  
• There are some restrictions on recording digital sig-  
nals. When making digital recordings, consult the  
instruction manual that came with your digital record-  
ing equipment (e.g., MD recorder or DAT deck) to  
know what restrictions are imposed.  
You cannot record the source connected to the MULTI  
CH INPUT connector.  
• There are some restrictions on recording digital sig-  
nals. When making digital recordings, consult the  
You cannot listen to a broadcast from one station  
while recording the broadcast from another.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording a Source—Continued  
Notes:  
Recording the Video from One  
• If you change the input source during recording, you  
will record the audio signals from the newly selected  
input source and the video signals assigned to that  
input source.  
Source and the Audio from Another  
You can add the sound from one source to the video of  
another source to make your own video recordings.  
Below is an example of recording the sound from a com-  
pact disc player connected to CD IN and the video from  
a video camera connected to Video 5 Input to video cas-  
sette tape in a video cassette recorder connected to the  
VIDEO 1 OUT jack.  
You cannot record the surround effects.  
The illustrations used here represent the DTR-7.4.  
Press the CD input source button.  
1
CD  
SetVIDEO 5for theVideo setting  
in the Video Setup sub-menu of  
2
Setup  
the Setup menu: Input Setup →  
Video Setup Video.  
Enter  
Return  
Basic Menu  
2.Input Setup  
Input:CD  
2-3.Video Setup  
Input:CD  
a.Video  
:VIDEO5  
b.Component Video  
:INPUT1  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Insert a CD in the CD player and  
insert a tape in the video camera  
connected to the Video 5 Input.  
3
Insert a video tape for recording in  
the video cassette recorder con-  
nected to VIDEO 1 OUT.  
4
Press the Rec Out button repeat-  
edly until Rec Sel:SOURCE”  
5
Rec Out  
appears in the front display.  
Now “CD” has been selected as the audio  
input source and “VIDEO 5” as the video  
input source.  
Start recording on the video cas-  
6
sette recorder and start playing at  
the CD player and video camera as  
desired.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input Setup (Basic)  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select 2. Input Setupand then  
press the Enter button.  
3
4
Input  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
T
uning  
Return  
Preset  
On  
Standby  
TV  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Enter  
Input  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
The “Input Setup” menu appears.  
1
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
Video  
5
Input  
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
7
8
9
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
DTR-7.4  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
1.Digital Setup  
2.Multichannel Setup  
3.Video Setup  
4.Character Input  
5.IntelliVolume  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Input  
Sleep  
Scroll wheel  
Setup/  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
+
CH  
Enter  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Enter/  
Cursor  
/
-
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
Display  
Muting  
/
/
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select Character Inputand then  
press the Enter button.  
Labelling the Input Source  
(Character Input)  
Enter  
The “Character Input” menu appears.  
This sub-menu allows you to give names to the stations  
you have preset for the AM/FM tuner, and to the input  
sources you have connected (excluding the tuner itself).  
Up to 10 characters can be entered for each name. For  
example, if you have a DVD connected to the VIDEO 4  
jack, then you can give it the name “DVD2.” Or, if you  
have multiple VCRs connected, you can enter the model  
names or manufacturer names for each one so that you  
do not have to remember which is connected to which  
input source.  
2-4.Character Input  
Input:DVD  
a.Character Display  
:No  
b.Character  
:
Press  
to edit.  
to clear.  
Enter  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select a. Character Displayand  
The illustrations used here represent the remote control-  
ler. When you perform the procedures on the DTR-7.4,  
use the corresponding buttons on the front panel.  
5
then use the  
and  
cursor but-  
Enter  
tons to set Yes.”  
Press the Input button, and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
1
2-4.Character Input  
Input:DVD  
Input  
input source you want to name.  
If you want to enter a name for a preset  
broadcast radio station, select the station  
that you want to name and enter the  
name.  
a.Character Display  
:Yes  
b.Character  
:
Press  
to edit.  
to clear.  
Enter  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the Setup button.  
2
Yes: Select to have your custom name  
displayed.  
The Basic menu appears onscreen.  
No: Select to have the default name dis-  
played.  
Basic Menu  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select b. Character.”  
6
3.Audio Adjust  
Advanced Menu  
Enter  
Press the  
cursor button to clear the  
current entry.  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
Press the cursor button to bring up the  
Character Input screen.  
Enter  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input Setup (Basic)—Continued  
After you have completed the  
name, press the Enter button until  
you return to the Character Input  
Sub-menu.  
Once 10 characters are entered, you will  
automatically return to the previous  
screen. If the name is completed before  
you enter 10 characters, enter spaces  
until 10 characters are entered.  
8
2-4.Character Input  
Input:DVD  
a.Character Display  
Enter  
:No  
b.Character  
:
Press  
to edit.  
to clear.  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Adjusting the Volume Differences  
Between Components (IntelliVolume)  
Use the  
/
/
/
buttons to  
7
This sub-menu allows you to adjust for the volume dif-  
ferences between your various input source components.  
When switching input sources, you may find that the  
output level for different components or input sources  
connected to the DTR-7.4 is different even though the  
main volume setting is the same. Under normal circum-  
stances, you would then have to change the volume set-  
ting each time you change the input source. This Intelli  
Volume setting allows you to preset a volume level for  
each input source separately so that when you do switch  
from one input source to another, the DTR-7.4 adjusts  
the volume accordingly and the volume stays the same.  
move the cursor to the desired  
character and then press the Enter  
button.  
The characters entered will appear in  
order in the 10-character space field  
above.  
Enter  
2-4.Character Input  
Input:DVD  
Enter  
b.Character  
:
ABCDEFGHIJKLM  
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklm  
nopqrstuvwxyz  
[ENTER] 0123456789-.’  
()+*/=,:;!?_  
Back:  
[RETURN]  
Use the same procedures as the  
1-3  
ones for the Character Input”  
sub-menu to display the Input  
Setupsub-menu.  
Note:  
If you are using the front display and not  
the OSD Menu, press the button when  
“Char: ” appears in the front display.  
Then “ABCDEF..” appears. This is the  
Character Input screen. The cursor but-  
tons will allow you to navigate through  
this screen just as they would if you were  
using the OSD Menu so you will need to  
refer to the figure below for the actual  
layout of the Character Input screen.  
At the Character Input screen, press the  
cursor buttons to move the cursor to the  
desired character and then press the  
Enter button. The characters entered will  
appear in order in the 10-character space  
field above. After two seconds, the Char-  
acter Input screen appears again.  
To change an existing character,  
move the cursor backward with the  
Return button or forward with the Enter  
button to the location of the mistaken  
character and then enter the desired char-  
acter as explained above.  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select IntelliVolumeand then  
press the Enter button.  
The “IntelliVolume” menu appears.  
4
Enter  
2-5.IntelliVolume Setup  
Input:DVD  
a.IntelliVolume  
:
0dB  
Enter  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Use the  
and  
cursor buttons  
5
6
to set the desired value.  
If the volume is quieter than other  
sources, increase its decibel level with  
Enter  
the  
than other sources, decrease its decibel  
level with the cursor button.  
cursor button, or if it is louder  
The Intelli Volume can be adjusted  
between –12 and +12 decibels.  
Press the Setup button to return to  
the main menu.  
To erase a character,  
enter a blank space in its place.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio Adjust (Basic)  
Adjusting the Bass andTreble Sound  
(Tone Control)  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
T
uning  
Return  
Preset  
On  
Standby  
TV  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Input  
This sub-menu allows you to adjust the bass and treble  
sounds.  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
1
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
Video  
5
Input  
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
7
8
9
DTR-7.4  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
3-1.Tone Control  
Custom  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
a.Bass  
:
:
0
0
Input  
Sleep  
Setup/  
Enter/  
Dimmer  
b.Treble  
TV  
Input  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Return/  
Cursor  
Disc  
-
Display  
Muting  
Quit:[SETUP]  
/
/
/
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
A-B  
Pure  
A
Direct  
L Night  
Re-EQ  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
-
Level  
+
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Genre  
Re-EQ  
L
a. Bass  
Caps  
Location  
-
RC 550M  
The Bass can be adjusted between –12 and +12 in 2-step  
increments.  
The “AudioAdjust” menu allows you to specify detailed  
settings for the audio signal. This section explains the  
basic settings for audio effects.  
The Bass adjustment is only enabled for the front left,  
center, front right, and subwoofer speakers.  
b. Treble  
The Treble can be adjusted between –12 and +12 in 2-  
step increments.  
The Treble adjustment is only enabled for the front left,  
center and front right speakers.  
Basic Menu  
3.Audio Adjust  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
1.Tone Control  
3.Audio Adjust  
2.Surround Speakers  
3.Sound Effect  
Advanced Menu  
default  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
SelectingSurroundSpeakerstoOutput  
the Sound (Surround Speakers)  
This sub-menu allows you to decide which speakers to  
output to when you are playing back a 5.1 channel  
source with surround back speakers connected.  
Display the main menu.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then press the Setup  
button.  
1
2
3-2.Surround Speakers  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
a.Surround Speakers  
for 5.1 Playback  
:Surround L/R  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
3. Audio Adjustand then press the  
Enter button.  
Quit:[SETUP]  
The “Audio Adjust” menu appears.  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
an item and then press the Enter button.  
3
4
a. Surround Speakers for 5.1 playback  
Surround L/R: Select to output the sound to the sur-  
round left and right speakers as normal and output noth-  
ing to the surround back speaker.  
Surround Back: Select to output the sound to the sur-  
round back speakers and output nothing to the surround  
left and right speakers.  
Surr L/R+Back: Select to output the sound to both the  
surround left and right speakers and the surround back  
speaker.  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
an item and then use the  
and  
cursor  
buttons to set the desired value.  
Press the Setup button to exit.  
5
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio Adjust (Basic)—Continued  
c. Double Bass  
Setting the Various Sound Effects  
(Sound Effect)  
The Double Bass function boosts the bass sound by letting  
the bass sound of “Front” speakers output also from the sub-  
woofer. To enable this function, in the “Speaker Config”  
menu, set the “Subwoofer” to “Yes” and “Front” to “Large.”  
On: Select to turn on the Double Bass function.  
Off: Select to turn off the Double Bass function.  
Note:  
This sub-menu is used to turn on and off the various  
sound effects available with the DTR-7.4.  
3-3.Sound Effect  
a.Re-EQ  
:Off  
:Off  
:On  
b.Upsampling  
c.Double Bass  
d.Late Night  
Double Bass “Off” is the THX preferred setting for accu-  
rate bass reproduction.  
:Off  
d. Late Night  
Quit:[SETUP]  
The audio for movies made for the cinema have a large  
dynamic range; thus, the difference between loud noises  
and soft noises is great. To hear the quieter sounds such as  
background noises or human conversations, the movie must  
be played back at higher volumes. When this setting is set  
to “High” or “Low,” the dynamic range of the sound is nar-  
rowed down to allow you to hear easily minute sounds at  
low volumes. This function is especially useful if you wish  
to play a movie at a low volume during the nighttime.  
This can be set to either “Off” or “Low,” or “High.”  
On the remote controller, press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the L Night button repeatedly.  
However, when the DTR-7.4 enters the standby state,  
this setting returns to the default setting (“Off”).  
Notes:  
• The Late Night function is effective only on Dolby  
Digital encoded software.  
a. Re-EQ  
Re-EQ (re-equalization) takes the edginess or “brightness”  
out of your home cinema sound to compensate for the fact  
that sound mixed for theaters may sound too bright when  
played back through speakers in the home environment.  
This can be set to either “On” or “Off.”  
On the remote controller, press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the Re-EQ button.  
b. Upsampling  
Upsampling processes the input digital signal, or the dig-  
ital signal converted from an analog input source, and  
converts its digital sampling frequency to twice its cur-  
rent frequency for an even further detailed sound repro-  
duction. This can be set to either “On” or “Off.” When  
“On” is selected, the Upsampling indicator lights.  
• The depth of the Late Night effect is determined by  
Dolby Digital software. With some sources, it may  
produce little or no effect.  
Settings possible for each listening mode (3-1. 3-2. 3-3. Sub-menu)  
Setting 3-1. Tone  
Control  
3-2. Surround  
Speakers  
a. Surround  
Speakers  
3-3. Sound Effect  
b. Upsampling*2  
d. Late Night*3  
a. Re-EQ  
c. Double Bass  
a. Bass  
Listening mode  
Mono  
b. Treble  
*5  
Direct/Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Theater-Dimensional  
DTS  
DTS-ES Matrix  
DTS-ES Discrete  
DTS 96/24  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital EX  
PLII Movie/PLII Music  
DTS Neo:6 Cinema/Music  
THX Cinema (PLII)  
THX Cinema (Neo:6)  
THX Cinema (DTS-ES)  
THX Surround EX  
Mono Movie  
Enhance  
*1  
*1  
*4  
*4  
*4  
Orchestra  
Unplugged  
Studio-Mix  
TV Logic  
All CH Stereo  
*1 Enabled for Dolby Pro Logic II Movie and DTS Neo:6 Cinema input sources.  
*2 Takes effect when playing an analog/PCM source in any of the listening modes marked with .”  
*3 Takes effect when playing a Dolby Digital source in any of the listening modes marked with .”  
*4 Enabled only when the input is a Dolby Digital 2 channel source.  
*5 Enabled when the Adcademy Filterfunction is set to Off.”  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input Setup (Advanced)  
Press the scroll wheel, and then press the  
Setup button.  
/ /  
/
Setup  
2
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
Return  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
N)  
D)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Input  
1
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
DTR-7.4  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Enter  
Input source  
buttons  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Input  
Sleep  
Scroll wheel  
Input  
When the “Basic Menu” is displayed, select  
Advanced Menu” using the and cursor  
buttons and press the Enter button to display the  
“Advanced Menu.”  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
/ /  
/
Enter  
Setup  
Display  
Muting  
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
2. Input Setupand then press the Enter  
button.  
3
4
5
The “Input Setup” menu appears.  
Conguring the Listening ModesYou  
Use Frequently  
(Listening Mode Preset)  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
Listening Mode Presetand then press  
the Enter button.  
The “Listening Mode Preset” menu appears.  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
Advanced Menu  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
an input source signals and then use the  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
4.Preference  
1.Digital Setup  
2.Multichannel Setup  
3.Video Setup  
4.Character Input  
5.IntelliVolume  
and  
cursor buttons to set the  
5.Network Setup  
6.Listening Mode Preset  
7.12V Trigger  
Basic Menu  
desired listening modes.  
• If you set “Last Valid” as the listening mode  
preset, the last listening mode used for the cur-  
rent input source type will be used automati-  
cally when the same input source type is  
selected to output next time.  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
With the DTR-7.4, you can set a different listening mode  
for each different signal type that comes from each input  
source. For example, if your DVD player also plays com-  
pact discs and the DVD video signal is Dolby Digital and  
the compact disc signal is PCM, then you can set a differ-  
ent listening mode for each.  
Press the Setup button to return to the  
main menu.  
6
This is especially convenient if you frequently play the  
same types of movies or music.  
Once the DTR-7.4 enters the standby state, the listening  
mode returns to the mode set at “Listening Mode Preset,”  
even after you changed the listening mode to a different  
listening mode while playing.  
The illustrations used here represent the remote control-  
ler. When you perform the procedures on the DTR-7.4,  
use the corresponding buttons on the front panel.  
Press the Input button, and then roll the  
scroll wheel to select the input source you  
1
want to set.  
Input  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input Setup (Advanced)—Continued  
Audio Adjust (Advanced)  
The “AudioAdjust” menu allows you to specify detailed  
settings for the audio signal. This section explains the  
advanced settings for audio effects.  
2-6.ListeningMode Preset  
Input:DVD  
a.Analog/PCM  
:Last Valid  
b.PCM fs=96k :Last  
c.Dolby D :Last Valid  
d.DTS  
e.D.F.2ch  
:Last Valid  
:Last Valid  
Advanced Menu  
3.Audio Adjust  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
4.Preference  
f.D.F.Mono:Last Valid  
1.Tone Control  
2.Surround Speakers  
3.Sound Effect  
4.Delay  
Quit:[SETUP]  
5.Network Setup  
5.LFE Level  
Basic Menu  
6.Mono  
7.Theater-Dimensional  
8.Surround  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
a. Analog/PCM  
Analog sources consist of LP records, FM and AM  
broadcasts, cassette tapes, and the like. PCM (Pulse  
Code Modulation) is one form of digital audio signal and  
is recorded directly onto compact discs and DVDs with-  
out compression.  
3.Audio Adjust  
9.THX  
10.Mono Movie  
11.Enhance  
12.Orchestra  
13.Unplugged  
14.Studio-Mix  
15.TV Logic  
default  
Available listening modes for “Analog/PCM” are Stereo,  
T-D, PL II/Neo:6, THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orches-  
tra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo,  
Mono, Pure Audio, and Direct.  
Display the main menu.  
1
2
Press the scroll wheel, and then press the Setup  
button to display the main menu on the monitor  
and front display.  
When the “Basic Menu” is displayed, select  
Advanced Menu” using the and cursor  
buttons and press the Enter button to display the  
“Advanced Menu.”  
b. PCM fs=96k  
Digital PCM sources recorded with a sampling rate of 96 kHz.  
Available listening modes for “PCM fs=96k” are Stereo,  
PL II, Pure Audio, and Direct.  
c. Dolby D (Dolby Digital)  
Digital data with AC-3 compression and a maximum of  
5.1 channel surround sound. This source signal comes  
from DVDs and LDs that have the  
mark and  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
3. Audio Adjustand then press the  
Enter button.  
therefore are recorded for 5.1 channel output.  
Available listening modes for “Dolby D” are Dolby D,  
THX, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV  
Logic, Stereo, and T-D.  
The “Audio Adjust” menu appears.  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
an item and then press the Enter button.  
d. DTS  
3
4
DTS (Digital Theater System) is compressed digital data  
with a maximum 5.1 channel surround output (6.1 chan-  
nel with DTS-ES Discrete sources) that allows for an  
extremely high-quality sound. This source signal  
requires a DVD player that supports DTS output and  
comes from DVDs, compact discs, and LDs that have the  
mark.  
Available listening modes for “DTS” are DTS, THX,  
Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic,  
Stereo, and T-D.  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
an item and then use the  
and  
cursor  
buttons to set the desired value.  
Press the Setup button to exit.  
Press the Return button to return to the previous  
menu.  
5
e. D.F. 2 ch (Digital Format 2 channel)  
Adjusting the Audio Delay  
(Delay Sub-menu)  
2 channel digital signals (not including PCM) such as  
Dolby Digital. DVDs or LDs recorded with 2 channel  
sound may be this type of input signal.  
Available listening modes for “D.F. 2 ch” are PL II/  
Neo:6, THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,  
Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo,  
Mono, Stereo, and T-D.  
This sub-menu gives you various ways to adjust the tim-  
ing of the audio output from the speakers to give certain  
soundfield effects or to adjust for unwanted asynchro-  
nous video and audio tracks.  
This sub-menu does not appear if “Direct” is selected as  
the listening mode.  
f. D.F. Mono (Digital Format Monaural)  
Monaural digital signals (not including PCM) such as  
Dolby Digital. DVDs or LDs recorded with monaural  
sound may be this type of input signal.  
This setting is not available when you select “Multichan-  
nel.”  
Available listening modes for “D.F. Mono” are Mono  
and Mono Movie.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio Adjust (Advanced)—Continued  
a. Dolby Digital  
3-4.Delay  
The level can be adjusted to either –or between –10 and  
0 decibels in 1 decibel increments. For Dolby Digital input  
source signals, the LFE level set here is used. A setting of  
0 decibels is recommended for optimum performance;  
however, if the source is recorded with the low frequency  
range too strong, lower this setting as necessary.  
a.A/V Sync  
: 0.0ms  
Relative Delay  
b.Center  
c.Surr L/R  
d.Surr Back  
: 0.0ms  
: 0.0ms  
: 0.0ms  
Quit:[SETUP]  
b. DTS  
The level can be adjusted to either –or between –10  
and 0 decibels in 1-decibel increments. For DTS input  
source signals, the LFE level set here is used. A setting  
of 0 decibels is recommended for optimum performance;  
however, if the source is recorded with the low frequency  
range too strong, lower this setting as necessary.  
a. A/V Sync  
If a digital signal processor is connected, there may be  
times when the audio and video from a DVD or LD  
player is not output in perfect sync. The result is where  
the sound and picture do not match and the sound is  
heard too early. In such a case, use this setting to prop-  
erly synchronize the audio and video. This setting can be  
set between 0 and 74.0 ms in 0.5 ms increments. Under  
normal circumstances, this can left at 0 ms. If the delay  
time is set between 24.5 and 74.0 ms, and upsampling is  
used, the delay will be fixed at 24.0 ms. Note that a  
change in the setting will not be displayed.  
Detailed Settings for Each Listening  
Mode  
Mono Sub-menu  
The settings of this sub-menu shown below are enabled  
when the listening mode is set to “Mono.”  
Relative Delay  
3-6.Mono Setup  
b. Center, c. Surr L/R, d. Surr Back  
Besides level and delay adjustments, this setting provides  
the ability to change or adjust the relative speaker position  
to fine tune the soundfield for the listener. This is accom-  
plished using Integra’s unique Enhanced Spatial Position-  
ing Algorithm. This adjustment provides 10 milliseconds  
of delay for the speakers, which is equivalent to moving  
the speaker 10 feet (3 meters) away. This adjustment is set  
up to provide –4.0 or +6.0 milliseconds (–4 or +6 feet/–1.2  
or +1.8 meters) of adjustment to the listener’s position.  
Once the coarse adjustments (i.e., speaker level and distance  
adjustments) are made, the system is set up to provide a typ-  
ical or broad surround environment. By adjusting the relative  
position of the speakers, we are able to alter the soundfield to  
be more spread out (deeper) or focused (shallower).  
a.Academy Filter:Off  
b.Input Channel  
:AutoL+R  
Quit:[SETUP]  
a. Academy Filter  
Older monaural film mixes relied on high-frequency  
rolloff in presentation to sound properly balanced, so  
that excessive hiss from the grain structure of the film  
would not be heard. The high-frequency loss was typi-  
cally due to a combination of optical slit loss, electrical  
filters, loudspeaker response, and screen loss. Some  
films have been transferred to video without such a high-  
frequency rolloff, and thus sound overly bright and hissy.  
The DTR-7.4 includes this “Academy Filter,” which is  
based on contemporary playback practices for such films  
over wide-range systems.  
Note:  
Surr Back cannot be selected if the Surr Back/Zone 2  
setting in the Surr Back/Zone 2 Sub-menu of the Hard-  
ware Setup Menu is set to “Zone 2.”  
This can be set to either “On” or “Off.”  
Setting the Low Frequency Effect  
Levels (LFE Level)  
b. Input Channel  
This allows you to set which input channel to use for  
monaural sound.  
This sub-menu is for setting the LFE (Low Frequency  
Effect) levels included in Dolby Digital and DTS software.  
Auto L+R: Select this under normal circumstances.  
When the input source is center channel, this center  
channel is used as the monaural sound input channel.  
Otherwise, the left and right channels are mixed and  
the mixed signal is used as the monaural sound input  
channel.  
3-5.LFE Level Setup  
a.Dolby Digital: 0dB  
b.DTS  
:
0dB  
Left/Right: You will need to select either left or  
right when playing a video source that contains  
bilingual data. In such a case, the left and right chan-  
nels will contain the audio for different languages.  
Select the channel with the language you desire.  
Quit:[SETUP]  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio Adjust (Advanced)—Continued  
Theater-Dimensional Sub-menu  
e. Dialog Enhance  
If the dialog from the center channel is difficult to hear  
in the Theater-Dimensional mode, use this setting to  
improve the clarity.  
Select this to modify the Theater-Dimensional (T-D) lis-  
tening modes.  
3-7.Theater-Dimensional  
On: Select to enhance the vocal ranges of the center  
channel signal.  
Off: Select to output the center channel signal at the  
regular level and frequency characteristics.  
a.Listening Angle  
:40  
b.Center  
:Off  
c.Front Expander:Off  
d.Virtual Surr Level  
: 0dB  
e.Dialog Enhance:Off  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Surround Sub-menu  
This sub-menu provides various settings for modifying  
the plain Dolby Digital, DTS, and Pro Logic II Surround  
listening modes.  
a. Listening angle  
The listening angle is the angle subtended by the front  
left and right speakers as seen from the listener. The pro-  
cessing for the virtual surround will be based on this  
angle. The setting of 20 and 40 degrees are only for nom-  
inal purposes, so select the setting that is closest to your  
actual listening angle.  
3-8.Surround Setup  
3-8.Surround Setup  
a.Surr Mode(Analog/PCM)  
:PL Movie  
d.DTS-ES  
:Auto  
b.Surr Mode(D.F.2ch)  
:PL Movie  
Pro Logic  
e.Panorama  
f.Dimension  
g.Center Width :3  
Neo:6 Music  
h.Center Image :3  
Music  
:Off  
:3  
c.Dolby D EX(Dolby D)  
:On  
Front left speaker  
Front right speaker  
a. Surr Mode (Analog/PCM)  
Changes the surround mode for when 2 channel analog/  
PCM signals are input.  
Listening angle  
PLII Movie: Select when you want to enable the  
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie listening mode.  
PLII Music: Select when you want to enable the  
Dolby Pro Logic ll Music listening mode.  
Neo:6 Cinema: Select when you want to enable the  
DTS Neo:6 Cinema listening mode.  
Neo:6 Music: Select when you want to enable the  
DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode.  
b. Center  
In the Theater-Dimensional mode, if the speaker system  
has a center speaker, the center channel signal can be  
output from the center speaker. For instance, in systems  
where the front left and right speakers are small, use of  
the center speaker may provide a better sound space and  
reduce the load on the front speaker. (For the proper  
soundfield, it is important that the speaker levels and  
speaker distances among the front right, front left, and  
center speakers are matched. In order to ensure this,  
make sure that the settings in the Speaker Distance Sub-  
menu and Level Calibration sub-menu are set correctly.)  
On: Select to have the center channel signal output  
to the center speaker.  
You can also easily change the Surr Mode settings using  
the remote controller. While playing the analog or PCM  
source, press the Surround button on the remote control-  
ler. Each press of the button cyclically changes the lis-  
tening modes in the order of “PLII Movie,” “PLII  
Music,” “Neo:6 Cinema,” and “Neo:6 Music.”  
b. Surr Mode (D.F.2ch)  
Changes the surround mode for when 2 channel digital  
signals are input.  
Off: Select to have the center channel signal output  
to the front left and right speakers (Phantom Center).  
PLII Movie: Select when you want to enable the  
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie listening mode.  
PLII Music: Select when you want to enable the  
Dolby Pro Logic ll Music listening mode.  
Neo:6 Cinema: Select when you want to enable the  
DTS Neo:6 Cinema listening mode.  
c. Front Expander  
The front expander function spreads out the stereo image  
in front of the listener. The created stereo image is as if  
the front speakers have been farther apart for the feeling  
of a wide sound space. This is especially useful for nar-  
row listening angles of 20 degrees or less.  
On: Select to turn on the front expander function to  
simulate a wider sound space.  
Neo:6 Music: Select when you want to enable the  
DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode.  
You can also easily change the Surr Mode settings using  
the remote controller. When you play 2ch digital source  
other than PCM (ex., the source in Dolby Digital for-  
mat), each press of the Surround button on the remote  
controller cyclically changes the listening modes in the  
order of “PLII Movie,” “PLII Music,” “Neo:6 Cinema,”  
and “Neo:6 Music.”  
Off: Select to turn off the front expander function for  
a normal sound space.  
d. Virtual Surr Level  
This setting adjusts the level of the virtual surround sig-  
nal. This can be set from –3 to +3 decibels. Lowering this  
setting can improve the sound when the definition is  
unclear or when the sound feels unnatural.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio Adjust (Advanced)—Continued  
c. Dolby Digital EX (Dolby D)  
reo recording feels somewhat like monaural or has nar-  
rowness, move the sound space backward to get more  
surroundness.  
If you have surround back speakers connected, use this  
setting to select whether or not you will use Dolby EX  
playback.  
g. Pro Logic II Music Center Width  
Auto: When the source has an EX flag (ID signal for  
Surround EX), the playback is automatically  
changed to Dolby Digital EX. If the source has no  
EX flag, the playback is changed to Dolby Digital.  
On: The playback is set to Dolby Digital EX.  
Off: The playback is set to normal Dolby Digital.  
If your surround channel is monaural or you do not have  
a surround channel, then the playback will be normal  
Dolby Digital regardless of the above setting.  
You can easily change the Dolby Digital EX mode settings  
using the remote controller. While playing a Dolby Digital  
source, after displaying the current listening mode with a  
press of the Surround button, each press of the Surround  
button on the remote controller cyclically changes the  
Dolby Digital EX mode in the order of “Auto,” “On,” and  
“Off.”  
In Pro Logic II decoding, center signals are output from  
the center speaker. When the center speaker is not used,  
the decoder will divide the center signal equally to both  
the front left and right speakers to create a “phantom”  
center sound image.  
The Pro Logic II Music Center Width mode allows you  
to adjust from where the center sound image is heard.  
Using this, you can have the soundfield be heard from  
the center speaker only, from the front left and right  
speakers only (as a phantom center sound image), or  
from all three speakers (center, front left and right) in  
various level combinations. The soundfield varies  
between 0 and 7 in steps of 1 and the default value is 3.  
For home use, applying some width to the center signal  
will improve the level balance for the center and main  
speakers, and will effect the width of the center sound  
image, or “weight” of the sound. Many sound recordings  
processed for stereo playback will be reproduced better  
by proper control of this setting. The recommended set-  
ting for Pro Logic II Music mode is “3.” This allows you  
to easily distinguish the Pro Logic II Music mode from  
the Pro Logic II Movie mode whose setting is automati-  
cally set to “0.”  
d. DTS-ES  
This setting selects the DTS-ES mode.  
Auto: Select to have the listening mode change auto-  
matically to DTS-ES Discrete or DTS-ES Matrix  
when the DTS source has the DTS-ES flag (ID sig-  
nal for DTS-ES). If the DTS source has no DTS-ES  
flag, the mode is changed to DTS 5.1.  
On: Select to have the listening mode change automati-  
cally to DTS-ES Discrete or DTS-ES Matrix when the  
DTS source has the DTS-ES flag, and to DTS + Neo:6  
when the DTS source has no DTS-ES flag.  
Off: Select to not use DTS-ES listening modes even  
when the DTS source has the DTS-ES flag. With this  
setting, the DTS sources are always played in DTS  
5.1 mode.  
h. Center Image  
DTS Neo:6 derives a center channel from 2 channel  
PCM and analog sources.  
In the cinema mode, for Lt/Rt film soundtracks, sounds  
steered to the center are subtracted from the left and right  
channels.  
In the music mode, the intent in the front channels is less  
one of steering and more one of stabilizing the front  
image by augmenting it with a center channel, while pre-  
serving the original perspective of the stereo mix. There-  
fore, the derived center is never fully subtracted from the  
left and right channels.  
You can also easily change the DTS-ES mode settings  
using the remote controller. While playing a DTS source,  
after displaying the current listening mode with a press  
of the Surround button, each press of the Surround but-  
ton on the remote controller cyclically changes the DTS-  
ES mode in the order of “Auto,” “On,” and “Off.”  
Center Image is the factor controlling the amount of sub-  
traction. It varies between 0 and 5 in steps of 1 and the  
default value is 3.  
e. Pro Logic II Music Panorama  
Use this setting to extend the front stereo image to  
include the surround speakers for an exciting wrap-  
around effect with side wall imaging.  
When Center Image=5, the factor is zero and nothing is  
subtracted from the left and right channels. When Center  
Image=0, the center channel is subtracted from the left  
and right channels at half level (–6 dB) for each channel.  
The signal level sent to the center channel output is not  
affected by Center Image.  
On: Select to turn on the PL II Music Panorama mode.  
Off: Select to turn off the PL II Music Panorama mode.  
f. Pro Logic II Music Dimension  
Use this setting to gradually adjust the soundfield for-  
ward or backward. It varies between 0 and 6 in steps of  
1 and the default value is 3.  
The setting of “3” is the normal position. Change the set-  
ting to “2” or lower to move the sound space forward and  
setting to “4” or higher to move the sound space backward.  
If the stereo recording has excessive broadness or a too  
strong surroundness, move the sound space forward to  
get the appropriate sound balance. In contrast, if the ste-  
This control should be set based on room layout and per-  
sonal preferences. A setting of 5 allows the left and right  
channels to pass through unaltered from the stereo mix.  
A setting of 0 gives more center channel dominance,  
which is particularly desirable if listeners are located  
well off-center. At any setting, the center speaker  
anchors the image.  
Center Image is only enabled when the listening mode is  
DTS Neo:6 Music.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio Adjust (Advanced)—Continued  
THX Sub-menu  
nal for DTS-ES). If the DTS source has no DTS-ES  
flag, the mode is changed to DTS 5.1.  
This sub-menu allows you to set the settings that will be  
enabled when the THX listening mode is selected.  
On: Select to have the listening mode change auto-  
matically to DTS-ES Discrete or DTS-ES Matrix  
when the DTS source has the DTS-ES flag, and to  
DTS + Neo: 6 when the DTS source has no DTS-ES  
flag.  
Off: Select to not use DTS-ES listening modes even  
when the DTS source has the DTS-ES flag. With this  
setting, the DTS sources are always played in DTS  
5.1 mode.  
3-9.THX Setup  
a.Re-EQ  
b.Decoder(2ch)  
:PL Movie  
c.THX Surr EX(Dolby D)  
:On  
:On  
d.DTS-ES  
:Auto  
Quit:[SETUP]  
You can also easily change the DTS-ES mode settings  
using the remote controller. While playing a DTS source,  
after pressing the THX button, each press of the THX  
button on the remote controller cyclically changes the  
DTS-ES mode in the order of “Auto,” “On,” and “Off.”  
a. Re-EQ (THX)  
Re-EQ (re-equalization) takes the edginess or “bright-  
ness” out of your home cinema sound to compensate for  
the fact that sound mixed for theaters may sound too  
bright when played back through speakers in the home  
environment.  
This can be set to either “On” or “Off”.  
You can use the Re-EQ button on the remote controller  
for setting “On” or “Off.”  
Note:  
THX Surround EX (Dolby D) and DTS-ES cannot be  
selected if the Surr Back/Zone 2 setting in the Surr Back/  
Zone 2 Sub-menu of the Hardware Setup Menu is set to  
“Zone 2” and the Surr Back setting in the Speaker Config  
Sub-menu of Speaker Setup menu is set to “None.”  
This setting returns to the default setting (“On”) when  
the DTR-7.4 enters the standby state.  
Mono Movie/Enhance/Orchestra/Unplugged/  
Studio Mix /TV Logic Sub-menu  
b. Decoder (2ch)  
This setting allows you to select the decoding mode for  
THX processing.  
The settings of these sub-menus become effective when  
any of the Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,  
Unplugged, Studio-Mix, or TV Logic listening modes  
are selected. When one of the listening modes is  
selected, the settings in the sub-menu of that listening  
mode become enabled.  
PLII Movie: Select for Dolby Pro Logic II Movie.  
Neo:6 Cinema: Select for DTS Neo:6 Cinema.  
You can also easily change the Decoder mode settings  
using the remote controller. While playing the analog or  
PCM source, each press of the THX button on the remote  
controller switches the listening modes between “PLII  
Movie” and “Neo:6 Cinema.”  
3-10.Mono Movie Setup  
a.Front Effect :On  
b.Reverb Level:Middle  
c.Reverb Time :Middle  
c. THX Surround EX (Dolby D)  
This setting allows you to set whether or not Dolby Dig-  
ital sources will be played back using THX Surround EX  
when a surround back speaker is connected.  
Auto: Select to automatically output sources with  
EX-identifying signals using THX Surround EX.  
On: Select to output using THX Surround EX  
regardless of whether or not the source contains EX  
identifiers.  
Quit:[SETUP]  
a. Front Effect  
Some live recordings contain acoustic reverberation.  
When you play these sources, more reverberation will be  
applied by the DSP, creating too many reverb effects and  
the sound loses frame or presence. In this case, set this  
setting to “Off” so that no reverberation from the DSP  
will be applied to the sound output from the three front  
channels. With this setting, the sound source is played as  
it is without any further reverberation.  
Off: Select not to output using THX Surround EX  
regardless of whether or not the source contains EX  
identifiers (Dolby D is used).  
You can also easily change the THX Surround EX mode  
settings using the remote controller. While playing a  
Dolby Digital source, after pressing the THX button,  
each press of the THX button on the remote controller  
cyclically changes the THX Surround EX mode in the  
order of “Auto,” “On,” and “Off.”  
b. Reverb Level  
This setting allows you to adjust the depth of acoustic  
reverberation to match the playback source material, the  
acoustics of your room, and other such factors.  
Select from the three settings “Low,” “Mid,” and “High.”  
d. DTS-ES  
This setting allows you to select the DTS-ES mode for  
THX processing.  
c. Reverb Time  
Adjust the reverb time to match the source being played  
back and the acoustics of the room. Select from the three  
settings “Short,” “Mid,” and “Long.”  
Auto: Select to have the listening mode change auto-  
matically to DTS-ES Discrete or DTS-ES Matrix  
when the DTS source has the DTS-ES flag (ID sig-  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preference (Advanced)  
The “Preference” menu allows you to perform  
miscellaneous settings for the DTR-7.4.  
Volume Setup Sub-menu  
This sub-menu allows you to make various settings con-  
cerning the volume control of the DTR-7.4.  
/ /  
/
Setup  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
4-1.Volume Setup  
Return  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
a.Volume Display  
:Absolute  
Clear  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
N)  
D)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Input  
b.Muting Level  
:-oodB  
1
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
DTR-7.4  
4
5
6
c.Maximum Volume  
:Off  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
10  
Clear  
d.Power On Volume  
:Last  
0
--  
/
---  
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Enter  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Input  
Sleep  
Scroll wheel  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
/ /  
/
a. Volume Display  
You can choose from two ways of displaying the volume  
setting on the screen.  
Enter  
Setup  
Display  
Muting  
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Absolute: This displays the volume with a minimum  
of 0 for no sound and a maximum of 100. As a refer-  
ence, the volume setting of Ref (82) is equivalent to  
0 decibels for the relative display method.  
Relative: This displays the volume as a decibel  
value on a scale with a designated reference point  
that is displayed as 0, which equals the volume set-  
ting of 82 of the absolute display method. With this  
display method, the minimum value is –, the next  
highest is –81, and the maximum value is +18.  
Advanced Menu  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
4.Preference  
4.Preference  
1.Volume Setup  
5.Network Setup  
Basic Menu  
2.Headphones Level  
3.OSD Setup  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
4.OSD Position  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
The illustrations used here represent the remote controller.  
When you perform the procedures on the DTR-7.4, use  
the corresponding buttons on the front panel.  
b. Muting Level  
This sets the attenuation level during playback when the  
MUTING button is pressed on the remote controller.  
This can be set to –, or between –50 and –10 decibels  
in 10 decibel increments.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then press the  
1
Setup button to display the main menu on  
the monitor and front display.  
c. Maximum Volume  
This setting allows you to set the maximum volume that  
can be output with the Master Volume dial. Setting a  
maximum volume allows you to prevent components  
from being damaged by excessively loud volumes. For  
the absolute volume display method, this can be set  
between 50 and 99. For the relative volume display  
method, this can be set between –32 and +17 decibels.  
To not set a maximum volume, select “Off.”  
When the “Basic Menu” is displayed, select  
Advanced Menu” using the and cursor  
buttons and press the Enter button to display the  
“Advanced Menu.”  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
4. Preferenceand then press the Enter  
button.  
2
d. Power On Volume  
The “Preference” menu appears.  
This sets a designated volume to which the DTR-7.4 will  
be set every time that the power is turned on. This pre-  
vents the DTR-7.4 from suddenly outputting very loud  
sounds if it is turned on while it is set to an extremely  
high volume. For the absolute volume display method,  
this can be set between 0 and 100. For the relative vol-  
ume display method, this can be set to –, or between  
–81 and +18 decibels. To have the DTR-7.4 turned on  
with its current volume setting, set this to “Last.”  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
an item and then press the Enter button.  
3
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
4
an item and then use the  
and  
cursor  
buttons to set the desired value.  
Press the Setup button to return to the  
main menu.  
5
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preference (Advanced)—Continued  
d. Display Position  
Adjusting the Headphone Volume  
Level (Headphones Level)  
Use this setting to select the position of the immediate  
display that appears when certain operations are  
performed. You can position the immediate display at  
any of ten different levels ranging from the top all the  
way to the bottom.  
If you notice a large difference in the volume when  
listening with the headphones than when listening to the  
speakers, you can change the headphone volume level so  
that you do not have to make adjustments with the main  
volume dial each time you put on the headphones.  
The headphone volume can be adjusted between –12 and  
+12 decibels.  
Switching the OSD Position  
(OSD Position)  
This sub-menu allows you to adjust the position of the  
OSD Setup Menu as it is displayed on your screen.  
Depending on the monitor used, there may be cases  
where the OSD Setup Menu is not displayed in the  
center and parts of the menus are cut off. To adjust the  
position of the OSD Setup Menu, simply press the cursor  
buttons to inch the menu to the position you desire.  
4-2.HeadphoneLevel  
a.Headphones Level  
: 0dB  
Quit:[SETUP]  
4-4.OSD Position  
Setting the Background Color for  
OSD (OSD Setup)  
Exit:[RETURN]  
This sub-menu allows you to customize the OSD Setup  
Menu to display in the manner you desire.  
4-3.OSD Setup  
a.Background Color  
:Blue1  
b.Component Video  
:OSD On  
c.Immediate Display  
:On  
d.Display Position  
:Bottom  
Quit:[SETUP]  
a. Background Color  
Select either Blue1, Blue2, Green1, Green2, Magenta,  
Red1, or Red2 as the background color when the OSD  
Setup Menu is displayed.  
b. Component Video  
You can select whether the OSD signal is output to the  
TV monitor connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO  
connectors or not.  
OSD On: The OSD signal is output.  
OSD Off: The OSD signal is not output.  
c. Immediate Display  
On: Select to have the screen immediately display  
certain operations as you perform them (e.g., having  
the input source displayed whenever an input source  
selector button is pressed). The display will remain  
for five seconds after the operation is completed.  
Off: Select to turn off the immediate display of oper-  
ations.  
VIDEO 1  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Analog Multichannel Audio Playback  
If your device (such as a DVD player or MPEG decoder)  
has a 5.1/7.1 channel analog output, you can enjoy ana-  
log multichannel audio playback.  
front panel, use the buttons corresponding to the ones on  
the remote controller.  
Press the Input button, and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source you want to set.  
Input  
1
Connecting to Devices with Analog  
Multichannel Output  
Connect the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of the DTR-7.4 to  
the 5.1 channel output jacks of the device. Make sure that  
you properly connect the left channels to the L jacks and  
the right channels to the R jacks.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the Setup button.  
The main menu appears.  
2
L
to White  
Front output  
to Red  
Subwoofer  
R
to Purple  
L
Surround  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
to Blue  
R
R
L
R
to Gray  
FRONT  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select Input Setupand then  
3
R
L
R
L
press the Enter button.  
The “Input Setup” menu appears.  
SUB CENTER  
SURR  
Enter  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
L
R
R
L
R
L
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
1.Digital Setup  
2.Multichannel Setup  
3.Video Setup  
4.Character Input  
5.IntelliVolume  
SURR  
BACK  
Ex: DVD-Audio player/  
MPEG decoder  
Enter  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
R
L
Surround  
back  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select Multichannel Setupand  
4
R
L
R
then press the Enter button.  
The “Multichannel Setup” menu appears.  
to Tan  
to Brown  
Enter  
2-2.Multichannel Setup  
Input:DVD  
L
Center  
to Green  
a.Multichannel :No  
Setup for Multichannel Output  
Enter  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Input  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
4
5
6
-
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
Return  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
Preset  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
/
Direct Tuning  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
Custom  
Zone  
2
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Use the  
and  
buttons to select  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
5
6
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
Yesand then press the Enter button.  
Input  
Sleep  
DTR-7.4  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
2-2.Multichannel Setup  
Input:DVD  
+
Enter  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Setup/Enter/  
Cursor  
Disc  
-
/
/
/
a.Multichannel :Yes  
Display  
Muting  
VOL /  
Surround  
Surround  
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Direct/Pure Audio  
Audio Selector  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
A-B  
Pure A, Direct  
CH SEL  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Pure  
A
Direct  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
-
Level  
+
Enter  
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Genre  
Re-EQ  
L
Caps  
Location  
Audio SEL  
-
RC 550M  
Level /+  
To enjoy multichannel audio, you need to perform the  
settings under the “Multichannel Setup” menu.  
Press the Setup button to return to  
the main menu.  
The procedures shown below assume using the remote  
controller. When performing these procedures using the  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Analog Multichannel Audio Playback—Continued  
Note:  
Playing Analog Multichannel Audio  
The speaker level for each multichannel analog input is  
Before enjoying analog multichannel audio, make sure  
that the connections and settings shown on the previous  
page are completed.  
independent from the speaker level settings made with  
the test tone. Therefore, you should perform the proce-  
dures above before enjoying analog multichannel audio.  
The illustrations used here represent the remote control-  
ler. When you perform the procedures on the DTR-7.4,  
use the corresponding buttons on the front panel.  
Changing the listening mode  
Each time you press the Direct/  
Pure A  
Direct  
Pure Audio button on the front  
panel, the display changes  
Press the Input button, and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select  
Input  
1
DVD.”  
between Direct”  
Pure  
Audio.When using the remote  
controller, press Pure A or Direct.  
Using the tone control  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
Press the Surround button on the  
front panel or the remote control-  
ler to display Tone On.”  
2
1
press the Audio SEL button  
repeatedly to select Multich.”  
On the DTR-7.4, use the Audio  
DTR-7.4  
Surround  
Selector button.  
Audio SEL  
Remote  
controller  
Surround  
Turn on the connected component  
and start playing the desired media.  
3
Adjust the volume with the Master  
4
Adjust the bass and treble sounds.  
Select “Setup Menu” “Audio Adjust  
Menu” “Tone Control” to display the  
“Tone Control” sub-menu and perform  
the bass and treble settings. For details,  
see page 54.  
2
Volume dial (or the VOL  
but-  
VOL  
tons on the remote controller).  
Adjusting the output level of each speaker as desired  
To disable the tone control function:  
Using the remote controller:  
Press the Direct/PureAudio button on the front panel (or  
the Direct button on the remote controller).  
Press the scroll wheel.  
1
Press the CH SEL button and  
select the desired speaker.  
CH SEL  
2
Press the Level or + button to  
adjust the volume level.  
3
-
+
Level  
Level  
Adjust the volume at each speaker so that  
all the volumes sound at the same level at  
the listening position. For the front right,  
front left, center, surround right, sur-  
round left, surround back right, and sur-  
round back left speakers, the output  
levels can be adjusted between –12 and  
+12 decibels. The subwoofer can be  
adjusted between –30 and +12 decibels.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Music in the Remote Zone  
• Use an RCA/phono audio connection cable to connect  
Connecting Zone 2  
the DTR-7.4’s PRE OUT SURR BACK/ZONE 2 L/R  
outputs to the analog audio inputs on your power amp.  
• Use a composite video connection cable to connect  
the DTR-7.4’s VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT to a composite  
video input on your Zone 2 TV.  
With Zone 2 you can enjoy one input source in the main  
room and a different source in another room. With Zone  
2 you can enjoy one input source in the main room and a  
different source in another room.  
There are three connection methods: using a receiver/  
integrated amp in Zone 2, using a power amp in Zone 2,  
or using only a pair of speakers in Zone 2.  
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker termi-  
nals on your power amp.  
Main Room  
Note:  
ZONE 2 is analog only. Digital signals are not output.  
If no sound is heard from the selected input source,  
check if the component is connected to the analog  
inputs.  
TV  
DTR-7.4  
Using a Receiver/Integrated Amp in Zone 2  
With this connection method you can use 7.1 surround  
sound in the main room and play a differentAV source in  
Zone 2. Zone 2’s volume is adjusted on the receiver/inte-  
grated amp.  
SURR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
ZONE  
2
• Set the Surr Back/Zone2 setting to Zone 2 (see page  
67).  
Zone 2  
• Use an RCA/phono audio connection cable to connect  
the DTR-7.4’s AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT L/R outputs to  
analog audio inputs on your receiver/integrated amp.  
• Use a composite video connection cable to connect  
the DTR-7.4’s VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT to a composite  
video input on your Zone 2 TV.  
Power amp  
Using Only Speakers in Zone 2  
With this connection method you can use 5.1 surround  
sound in the main room and play a differentAV source in  
Zone 2. Zone 2’s volume is adjusted on the DTR-7.4.  
• Set the Surr Back/Zone2 setting to Zone 2 (see page  
67).  
Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker terminals  
on your receiver/integrated amp.  
Main Room  
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the DTR-7.4’s  
SURR BACK/ZONE 2 SPEAKERS terminals.  
• Use a composite video connection cable to connect  
the DTR-7.4’s VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT to a composite  
video input on your Zone 2 TV.  
TV  
DTR-7.4  
Main Room  
R
L
ZONE 2  
OUT  
TV  
DTR-7.4  
Zone 2  
TV  
IN  
R
L
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
SURR  
BACK/  
ZONE 2  
SPEAKERS  
Using a Power Amp in Zone 2  
R
L
With this connection method you can use 5.1 surround  
sound in the main room and play a different source in  
Zone 2. Zone 2’s volume is adjusted on the DTR-7.4.  
• Set the Surr Back/Zone2 setting to Zone 2 (see page  
67).  
Zone 2  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Music in the Remote Zone—Continued  
Setup  
/ /  
/
When you connect speakers  
whose impedance values are  
between 4 and 6 ohms, select  
Speaker Impedanceto display  
the sub-menu and set the value for  
the Minimumto 4 ohms.”  
For details, see page 30.  
Even if you connect some speakers whose  
impedance values are between 6 and 16  
ohms among speakers whose impedance  
values are between 4 and 6 ohms, set the  
“Minimum” value to “4 ohms.”  
3
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
T
uning  
Standby  
Return  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
Phones  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DTR-7.4  
Enter  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
Input  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
0-1.Speaker Impedance  
Custom  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
a.Minimum  
:6 ohms  
Input  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
/ /  
/
Display  
Muting  
Enter  
Setup  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Performing the Settings for the  
Remote Zone (Zone 2)  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select Surr Back/Zone 2and  
then press the Enter button.  
4
5
To enjoy movies and audio in the remote zone (Zone 2),  
you need to perform the remote zone settings.  
The “Surr Back/Zone 2” menu appears.  
Advanced Menu  
Use the  
and  
cursor buttons  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
to select Zone 2or Surr Back.”  
0.Hardware Setup  
2.Input Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
4.Preference  
0-2.Surr Back/Zone2  
1.Speaker Impedance  
2.Surr Back/Zone2  
3.Remote Setup  
4.TV Format  
5.Network Setup  
Enter  
Basic Menu  
a.Surr Back/Zone2  
:Zone2  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Enter  
The procedures shown below assume using the remote  
controller. When performing these procedures using the  
front panel, use the buttons corresponding to the ones on  
the remote controller.  
Surr Back: Use the SURR BACK/  
ZONE 2 outputs (SPEAKERS and PRE  
OUT) as surround back outputs.  
Select this option when connecting a receiver/  
integrated amp in Zone 2 (see page 66).  
Zone 2: Use the SURR BACK/ZONE 2 out-  
puts (SPEAKERS or PRE OUT) for Zone 2.  
Select this option when connecting a power  
amp or only speakers in Zone 2 (see page 66).  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
1
press the Setup button to display  
the main menu on the monitor and  
front display.  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select 0. Hardware Setupand  
2
then press the Enter button.  
Enter  
Press the Setup button to return to  
the main menu.  
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.  
6
When the “Hardware Setup” menu item  
does not appear, select “Advanced  
Menu” to display the “Advanced Menu.”  
Note:  
Enter  
When the SURR BACK/ZONE 2 outputs (SPEAKERS  
and PRE OUT) are set to Zone 2, listening modes that  
need surround back speakers (i.e., Dolby Digital EX,  
DTS-ES, and THX Surround EX) are not available.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Music in the Remote Zone—Continued  
Input source  
Zone 2  
To adjust the Zone 2 volume with  
the remote controller, press the  
Zone 2 button, and then use the  
Level /+ buttons.  
Standby  
3
buttons  
On  
1
Standby  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Master Volume  
TV  
Zone2  
Input  
On  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
2
3
+
TV CH  
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
Return  
4
5
6
Preset  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
7
8
9
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
Clear  
+10  
0
Clear  
N)  
D)  
--  
/
---  
Direct Tuning  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Custom  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
To do this on the DTR-7.4,use the  
DTR-7.4  
Input  
Sleep  
-
+
Dimmer  
Level  
Level  
or  
cursor buttons.  
Zone 2  
u
M
e
n
e
TV  
n
u
M
p
o
T
Input  
A
u
d
i
o
A
D
J
+
CH  
If your Zone 2 receiver/integrated amp  
is connected to the DTR-7.4’s AUDIO  
ZONE 2 OUT L/R outputs, use the vol-  
ume control on the receiver/integrated  
amp.  
Scroll wheel  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
e
E
d
i
x
i
t
u
G
R
e
p
u
t
u
t
e
r
n
S
Display  
Muting  
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
A-B  
Pure  
A
Direct  
Level /+  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
-
Level  
+
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Genre  
Re-EQ  
L
Caps  
Location  
-
RC 550  
M
To turn off Zone 2 with the remote  
controller, press the Zone 2 but-  
ton followed by the Standby but-  
ton.  
4
Zone2  
Enjoying Music in the Remote Zone  
The section explains how to turn on, select an input  
source, and adjust the volume for Zone 2.  
To do this from the DTR-7.4,  
press the Zone 2 button,and then  
press the Off button within eight  
seconds.  
Standby  
Note:  
To control Zone 2 with the remote controller, you must  
first press its Zone 2 button, and then press the next but-  
ton within five seconds (i.e., while the DTR-7.4’s  
Standby indicator is flashing).  
Notes:  
• If the Sleep function has been set, any Zone 2 compo-  
nent will turn off along with the DTR-7.4 when the  
specified sleep time expires. To use the Sleep function  
with Zone 2 only, set the Sleep function and then set  
the DTR-7.4 to Standby.  
• Only analog input sources are output by the PRE OUT  
SURR BACK/ZONE 2 outputs and the SURR BACK/  
ZONE 2 SPEAKERS terminals. Digital input sources  
are not output. If no sound is heard when an input  
source is selected, check if it’s connected to analog  
inputs.  
• Since the Zone 2 function and the REC OUT outputs  
use the same circuitry, if the Rec Out button is pressed,  
Zone 2 will be turned off.  
• When the SURR BACK/ZONE 2 outputs (SPEAK-  
ERS/PRE OUT) are set to Zone 2 (page 67), listening  
modes that need surround back speakers (i.e., Dolby  
Digital EX, DTS-ES, and THX Surround EX) are not  
available.  
Point the remote controller at the  
DTR-7.4 and press the Zone 2  
button followed by the On button.  
This activates Zone 2 and, if connected  
to the DTR-7.4’s 12V TRIGGER OUT,  
turns on the Zone 2 amp.  
1
Zone2  
On  
To do this on the DTR-7.4, press  
the Zone 2 button.  
To select the Zone 2 input source  
with the remote controller, press  
the Zone 2 button and then roll  
the scroll wheel.  
2
Zone2  
The name of the selected Zone 2 source  
appears on the display.  
To do this on the DTR-7.4, press  
the Zone 2 button,and then press  
an input source button within  
eight seconds.  
If you select AM or FM, you can use  
the remote controller’s CH/Disc +/–  
button to select the presets.  
To set the main room and Zone 2  
sources simultaneously, press the Zone  
2 button repeatedly until “Z2 Sel:  
SOURCE” appears on the display.  
Now use the scroll wheel or input  
source buttons to select the source.  
• While Zone 2 is active,  
functions will not work.  
• While Zone 2 is active, the PureAudio listening mode  
cannot be selected for the main room.  
You can’t select different radio bands for Zone 2 and  
the main room. For example, if you select FM for the  
main room, then FM will also be selected for Zone 2.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Components not Reached by the Remote  
Controller Signals (IR IN/OUT)  
In order to use the remote controller to control the  
DTR-7.4 from a remote location, you will need to pre-  
pare a multi-room kit (sold separately) such as one of  
those given below:  
• Onkyo’s Multi-Room System kits (IR Remote  
Controller Extension System)  
Make the connection as shown below. Do not plug in any  
equipment to the power outlet until all the connections  
are complete.  
from connecting block  
Mini plug cable  
DTR-7.4  
• Multiroom A/V distribution and control system such  
as those from Niles and Xantech  
®
®
RF Receivers also can be used with the remote controller  
to control the DTR-7.4 from a remote location. To use  
RF Receivers, set the Transmission Signal Format set-  
ting to “RF.” (See page 70 for details.)  
IR  
IN  
OUT  
If Remote Controller Signal Does not  
Reach the DTR-7.4 Remote Sensor  
If Remote Controller Signal Does not  
Reach Other Components  
If the DTR-7.4 is located inside a cabinet or other enclosure  
where the infrared rays from the remote controller cannot  
enter, then operation with the remote controller will not be  
possible. In such a case, it will be necessary to install a  
remote sensor at a location outside of the cabinet that the  
infrared rays from the controller can reach.  
With this connection, select “Main” for the  
Hardware Setup Remote Setup Position in the  
Setup Menu (See page 31).  
In this situation, you will need to use a commercially  
available IR emitter. Connect the mini plug of the IR  
emitter to the IR OUT terminal on the DTR-7.4 and then  
place the IR emitter on the remote sensor of the  
component or facing it. When the IR emitter is  
connected, only the signal input to the IR IN terminal is  
output to the IR OUT terminal. The signal input from the  
remote sensor on the front of the DTR-7.4 will not be  
output to the IR OUT terminal.  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
block  
IR IN  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
block  
IR IN  
DTR-7.4  
DTR-7.4  
IR OUT  
Remote controller  
IR Emitter  
In the  
cabinet  
Remote controller  
: Signal ow  
The IR IN input allows you to control the DTR-7.4 from  
the remote zone (Zone 2) with the remote controller even  
though the remote zone may be on the other side of the  
building from the main zone. The diagram below shows  
how to make the proper connections for the remote zone.  
With this connection, select “Zone 2” for the  
Hardware Setup Remote Setup Position in the  
Setup Menu (See page 31).  
Other  
component  
: Signal ow  
Other component  
: Signal ow  
Remote control  
sensor  
IR  
IN  
Emitter  
Mini plug  
OUT  
To IR IN  
IR Receiver  
IR Emitter  
DTR-7.4  
Connecting  
block  
DTR-7.4  
Remote controller  
Main room  
Zone 2 room  
: Signal ow  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Remote Controller with Radio  
Frequency  
Changing the Remote Controller’s  
Transmission Signal Format (IR/RF)  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
same channel as the RF receiver,  
and then press the scroll wheel.  
Channels 0 to 3 can be selected.  
If the ID and channel have been set suc-  
cessfully, “OK” appears on the display.  
6
You can set the remote controller’s transmission signal  
format to either infrared (IR) or radio frequency (RF).  
The default setting is IR.  
This is useful when, for example, the DTR-7.4 is  
installed in a rack or is not in line of sight of the remote  
controller as it allows you to use a commercially avail-  
able RF receiver to pick up commands from the remote  
controller, which are then fed to the DTR-7.4 via its IR  
IN socket. For this to work, you must assign the same  
ID and channel to the remote controller and RF receiver.  
Press and hold the Custom button  
for more than three seconds.  
1
Custom  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“SETUP,and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
2
Roll the scroll wheel to select “IR/  
RF,” and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
3
Roll the scroll wheel to select “IR”  
or “RF,” and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
4
When you select “IR.”  
If you select “RF,” roll the scroll  
5
wheel to select the same ID as the  
RF receiver, and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
IDs 0 to 9 and A to F can be selected.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using an External Device with 12V Trigger  
Terminal  
Connecting to an External Device  
with 12V TRIGGER Terminal  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
5
an item and then use the  
and  
cursor  
buttons to set the desired setting.  
2-7.12V Trigger Setup  
Input:DVD  
DTR-7.4  
a.Trigger A  
:On  
b.Trigger B  
:Off  
A
ZONE 2  
12V  
TRIGGER OUT  
Quit:|SETUP|  
B
This sub-menu allows you to make the required  
settings to turn on the output from the 12V  
TRIGGER terminal to control another compo-  
nent or device with the DTR-7.4 for each input  
source.  
12V TRIGGER  
12V TRIGGER  
12V TRIGGER  
Device A  
Device B  
a. Trigger A  
On: Select to activate the device connected to  
the 12V TRIGGER A terminal when the input  
source is selected.  
The device located  
in the Zone 2  
Off: Select when no device is connected to the  
12V TRIGGER A terminal or you do not want  
the connected device to activate.  
These outputs can be connected to the 12-volt trigger  
inputs on other components. They output 12 volts (100  
milliamperes max). The ZONE 2 TRIGGER OUT out-  
puts 12 volts while the DTR-7.4 is in Zone 2 mode. The  
A and B outputs can be assigned to input sources, in  
which case, the assigned trigger output outputs 12 volts  
while the input source is selected.  
b. Trigger B  
On: Select to activate the device connected to  
the 12V TRIGGER B terminal when the input  
source is selected.  
Off: Select when no device is connected to the  
12V TRIGGER B terminal or you do not want  
the connected device to activate.  
Conguring the 12V Trigger Terminal  
Press the Setup button to return to the  
main menu.  
Press the Input button, and then roll the  
scroll wheel to select the input source you  
want to set.  
6
1
Press the scroll wheel, and then press the  
Setup button.  
2
When the “Basic Menu” is displayed, select  
Advanced Menu” using the and cursor  
buttons and press the Enter button to display the  
“Advanced Menu.”  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
2. Input Setupand then press the Enter  
button.  
3
The “Input Setup” menu appears.  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
12V Triggerand then press the Enter  
button.  
4
The “12V Trigger” menu appears.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio  
Features  
System Requirements  
The DTR-7.4 is a network audio client that is con-  
nected via a LAN to the Network Audio Server with  
Net-Tune System Protocol and allows you to enjoy  
music files saved on the server, as well as Internet  
radio, from anywhere in your home.  
Requirements for listening to both Internet radio sta-  
tions and music files saved on the music server  
I Modem (a device that provides Internet connections  
via leased lines; e.g., a cable modem, xDSL modem,  
terminal adapter)  
* To have access to Internet, you typically need to con-  
tract with an Internet service provider (ISP). Modem  
requirements differ from ISP to ISP; for detailed  
information, consult with your ISP or PC retailer.  
I Router (gateway) (a device that enables multiple  
PCs or devices to connect to the Internet simulta-  
neously)  
An IP address can be obtained automatically by using  
the router’s DHCP function.  
* Some routers have built-in modem functionality.  
Router requirements differ from ISP to ISP; for  
detailed information, consult with your ISP or PC  
retailer.  
Internet radio features  
The DTR-7.4 provides enhanced support for Internet  
radio and allows you to:  
• Listen to both WMA and MP3 audio streamed from  
Internet radio stations  
• Select stations by genre, location, or language  
• Preset up to 30 Internet radio stations  
Net-Tune Features  
The Network Audio Server distributes music files  
through LAN to the DTR-7.4.  
The DTR-7.4 plays distributed music data whenever  
you need.  
In the connection between the Network Audio Server  
and the DTR-7.4, the standard TCP/IP network protocol  
and the Integra/Onkyo’s proprietary NTSP protocol is  
used for music distribution through LAN. The NTSP  
protocol handles not only data for music itself but also  
additional music information including the name of  
tracks and artists, enabling high usability.  
I Ethernet CAT-5 cable  
I Minimum Internet Connection Requirements:  
Broadband Internet Connection  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)  
based network (requires a DHCP-enabled router)  
100Base-TX switch built-in broadband router  
(recommended)  
Notes:  
• To enjoy music on Internet Radio, it is assumed that  
you provide a broadband Internet connection on  
which you can successfully run a web browser. If you  
have any problem in connecting to the Internet, con-  
sult with your ISP.  
The Network Audio Server supports WAVE (PCM) and  
MP3 formats. The WAVE format has high sound quality  
(equivalent to CD) with no compression. The MP3 for-  
mat is widely used through Internet environment and  
has near-CD quality with compression.  
• If your ISP contract assumes manual configuration of  
network settings, you need to manually configure  
your network settings as described in “Network Setup  
Menu” (see page 76).  
Hint:  
File Format: MP3 (Approximately 1 MB for 1 minute)  
WAVE (PCM) (Approximately 10 MB  
for 1 minute)  
• The DTR-7.4 does not support network settings for  
PPPoE connections; if your ISP contract requires  
PPPoE, therefore, you must have a gateway/router  
with PPPoE support.  
For details on the Network Audio Server or the  
Net-Tune related products, go to the URL below.  
http://www.integrahometheater.com/  
You may have to set up a proxy server to listen to  
Internet radio, depending on the ISP you choose. If  
your PC is configured to use a proxy server for Inter-  
net access, the DTR-7.4 must also be configured the  
same way. For more information, see “Proxy Setup  
Sub-menu” (see page 77).  
• The DTR-7.4 is designed to take advantage of the  
DHCP and AutoIP functionality, thereby automati-  
cally configuring the network settings. If you opt not  
to use the DHCP and AutoIP functionality, you  
should manually configure the network settings. For  
more information, see “IP Address Sub-menu” (see  
page 77).  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio—Continued  
Hint:  
Connecting the DTR-7.4 toYour  
Ethernet Network  
Connecting more than one DTR-7.4 unit to a router  
enables several users to listen to Internet radio at differ-  
ent stations or different music pieces contained in the  
same library on the Network Audio Server.  
Plug one end of an Ethernet CAT-5 cable into the port  
on the backside of the DTR-7.4 and the other end into  
the gateway.  
Internet radio  
DTR-7.4  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
VIDEO  
FRONT SPEAKERS  
SURR SPEAKERS  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
AV RECEIVER  
R
L
R
L
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
MODEL NO. DTR-7.4  
RATING: AC 120V  
60Hz 8.1A  
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
SURR  
AC OUTLETS  
Network Audio Server  
R
L
BACK  
ZONE  
/
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
SURR  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
BACK/  
2
3
PB  
PR  
ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
2
AUDIO  
R
L
AC 120V  
SWITCHED  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
60Hz  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
R
L
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
IR  
AC INLET  
IN  
A
ZONE  
2
Modem  
R
L
12V  
OPT  
1
OUT  
IN  
TRIGGER OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
RS232  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
OUT  
B
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
To the WAN side  
To the LAN side port  
Internet  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
To the LAN side port  
Modem  
Router  
To the LAN side port  
Router  
To the WAN side  
DTR-7.4  
DTR-7.4  
To the LAN  
side port  
Room 1  
Room 2  
To the LAN  
side port  
LAN port/  
Ethernet, etc.  
Network Audio Server  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio—Continued  
Using the Remote Controller  
To select Net-Tune mode, press the Mode button,  
and then roll the scroll wheel until “NET-T” appears  
on the display.  
Scroll wheel  
Note:  
While neither the Input button nor Mode button is illu-  
minated, the scroll wheel changes the input source and  
remote controller mode simultaneously. (e.g., set the  
input source to “MSRV/IRD” and the mode to “NET-T.”)  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
Input  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
10  
Clear  
0
-- ---  
/
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone2  
Input  
Dimmer  
Sleep  
TV  
Input  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
Display  
Muting  
Step/Slow  
Rec  
Random  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Pure A  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
-
A B  
Direct  
-
+
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Album  
Level  
Level  
Playlist  
Artist  
Genre  
-
Audio SEL  
Delete  
L Night  
Re EQ  
Caps  
Language  
Location  
-
RC 550M  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio—Continued  
1Number/letter buttons [82]  
These buttons are used to enter numbers and letters  
when searching for music in your Network Audio  
Server.  
EStop  
button [82]  
This button is used to stop playback.  
FRandom button [83]  
This button is used for random playback.  
2Mode button [80, 82]  
GArtist button [83]  
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,  
and then roll the scroll wheel until “NET-T” appears  
on the display.  
This button is used to search the Network Audio  
Server’s music library by artist.  
HGenre button [80, 83]  
This button is used to search the Network Audio  
Server’s music library by genre, and to search for  
Internet radio stations by genre.  
3Up/Down/Left/Right  
/
/
/
& Enter  
buttons  
These buttons are used to navigate Internet radio  
and Net-Tune server menus. The Enter button is  
used to confirm items and to start playback of the  
Network Audio Server.  
ILocation button [80]  
This button is used to search for Internet radio sta-  
tions by country.  
JLanguage button [80]  
4CH/Disc button [81]  
This button is used to search for Internet radio sta-  
tions by language.  
This button is used to select Internet radio presets.  
5Play  
button [82]  
This button is used to start playback of the Network  
Audio Server.  
6Previous/Next  
/
buttons [82]  
The Previous  
button is used to select the pre-  
vious track. During playback it selects the begin-  
ning of the current track. The Next  
used to select the next track.  
button is  
7Pause  
button [82]  
This button is used to pause playback.  
8Repeat button [83]  
This button is used for repeat playback.  
9Album button [83]  
This button is used to search the Network Audio  
Server’s music library by album.  
0Playlist button [83]  
This button is used to search the Network Audio  
Server’s library by playlist.  
ACaps button [83]  
This button is used to select lowercase letters,  
uppercase letters, and numbers when searching for  
the Network Audio Server’s music by album, artist,  
or playlist.  
BDelete button [83]  
This button is used to delete characters entered with  
the number/letter buttons.  
CInput button [80, 82]  
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
“MSRV” (Music Server) or “IRD” (Internet Radio)  
appears on the display.  
DFR/FF  
The FR  
FF  
/
buttons [82]  
button is used to start fast reverse. The  
button is used to start fast forward.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio—Continued  
Press the Input button, and then roll the  
scroll wheel to select either IRDor  
MSRV.”  
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
1
2
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
T
uning  
Standby  
Return  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
Phones  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
Press the scroll wheel, and then press the  
Setup button.  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DTR-7.4  
When the “Basic Menu” is displayed, select  
Advanced Menu” using the and cursor  
buttons and press the Enter button to display the  
“Advanced Menu.”  
Return Setup  
Enter  
/ / /  
4
5
6
-
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
5. Network Setupand then press the  
Enter button.  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
3
Input  
Sleep  
Input  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
The “Network Setup” menu appears.  
Setup  
Return  
/ / /  
Enter  
Display  
Muting  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
an item and then press the Enter button.  
4
5
Network Setup Menu  
Use the and cursor buttons to select  
an item and then use the  
and  
cursor  
Before you can use the DTR-7.4 to play music contained  
in the music library on the Network Audio Server and  
listen to Internet radio, you must correctly configure the  
DTR-7.4’s network settings so that it can connect to  
your LAN and the Internet.  
It is strongly recommended to use a broadband connec-  
tion (via an xDSL or CATV leased line) and a router. If  
you are connected to the Internet via a narrowband dial-  
up connection, you may not be able to enjoy Internet  
radio as you expect or at all.  
buttons to set the desired value.  
When youve completed the settings on  
any menu, press the Return button to  
return to the 5. Network Setupmenu,  
use the and cursor buttons to select  
Save Settings,and then press Enter.  
Don’t turn off the DTR-7.4 while the settings are  
being saved (about 2 seconds), otherwise they’ll  
be lost.  
6
Before setting up the DTR-7.4, make sure that you are  
already using a router that provides Internet access and  
that the DTR-7.4 is correctly connected with your router  
or hub via a LAN cable.  
Press the Setup button to exit the Setup  
menu.  
7
For more information on Internet connectivity, consult  
with your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or refer to the  
router documentation.  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) and  
AutoIP are mechanisms for network configuration,  
which assign IP addresses automatically to network  
devices such as the DTR-7.4, PC, and broadband router.  
DNS (Domain Name System) is a mechanism which  
translates domain names into IP addresses or vice versa.  
Domain names such as www.onkyo.co.jp are used for  
Web browsing, and IP addresses such as 210.199.170.69  
are used for actual network data transfer.  
5.Network Setup  
Advanced Menu  
1.IP Address  
2.Proxy Setup  
3.MAC Address  
4.Client Setup  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
4.Preference  
5.Network Setup  
Save Settings  
Basic Menu  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio—Continued  
IP Address Sub-menu  
sure to enter the subnet mask exactly as specified by  
your ISP. Usually, enter 255.255.255.0 here.  
You can use this submenu to turn on/off the DHCP and  
Auto IP functionality.  
d. Gateway  
You will enter this value when you set the a. DHCP/  
AUTO IP setting above to Off.  
Also, you can use this menu to manually configure net-  
work settings. Referring to the documentation from  
your ISP, enter the IP address and subnet mask assigned  
to your DTR-7.4 as well as the IP addresses of the  
default gateway and DNS server.  
Enter the IP address of the default gateway. If your  
DTR-7.4 is directly connected with an xDSL modem or  
terminal adapter, be sure to enter the gateway address  
exactly as specified by your ISP. If your DTR-7.4 is  
connected to a gateway/router, enter the IP address of  
the gateway/router.  
After the necessary settings are complete, press the  
Return button to go back to “5. Network Setup  
Menu,” select “Save Settings, ” and press the  
Enter button to save the setting you made.  
DNS Server  
e. 1st  
When you set a. DHCP/AUTO IP to Off, select a menu  
item under b. and press the Enter or  
DTR-7.4 will enter the number-entry mode.  
Select a number using the buttons, and press the  
Enter button to enter the number.  
After all the necessary numbers are entered, the  
DTR-7.4 exits the number-entry mode.  
button; the  
f. 2nd  
You will enter this value when you set the a. DHCP/  
AUTO IP setting above to Off.  
Enter the IP address of the DNS server. If your DTR-7.4  
is directly connected with an xDSL modem or terminal  
adapter, be sure to enter the DNS address exactly as  
specified by your ISP.  
/
5-1.IP Address  
When your Internet service provider provides only one  
DNS address, enter this address into “e. 1st.” When two  
or more DNS addresses are provided, enter both of them  
into “e. 1st” and “f. 2nd,” respectively.  
a.DHCP/AUTO-IP  
b.IP Address  
:192.168. 9. 10  
c.SUBNET Mask  
:255.255.255. 0  
d.Gateway  
:192.168. 9. 1  
DNS Server  
e.1st:192.168. 9. 1  
f.2nd: 0. 0. 0. 0  
:On  
Note:  
After setting, allow approx. 2 seconds until the DTR-7.4  
stores all of the data in the memory. Be sure not to turn  
off the power during that time otherwise the data will be  
lost.  
a. DHCP/AUTO IP  
Sets whether the network setting is configured automat-  
ically or not.  
Proxy Setup Sub-menu  
On: The network setting will be configured automati-  
cally. When you set this option to On, the values for b.  
through f. will be assigned using DHCP.  
Off: The network setting is configured manually.  
Configure this item if your DTR-7.4 uses a proxy server  
to connect to the Internet.  
Enter the proxy server settings exactly as specified by  
your ISP.  
b. IP Address  
You will enter this value when you set the a. DHCP/  
AUTO IP setting above to Off.  
Enter the IP address assigned to your DTR-7.4. If your  
DTR-7.4 is directly connected with an xDSL modem or  
terminal adapter, be sure to enter the static IP address  
exactly as specified by your ISP.  
Specify the IP address within the range below. The Net-  
work Audio cannot be used with IP addresses out of the  
ranges below.  
After the necessary settings are complete, press the  
Return button to go back to “5. Network Setup  
Menu,” select “Save Settings,” and press the Enter  
button to save the setting you made.  
5-2.Proxy Setup  
a.Proxy Server  
:Off  
b.Proxy Address  
:
c.Proxy Port  
:
0
CLASS A: 10.0.0.0–10.255.255.255  
Quit:[SETUP]  
CLASS B: 172.16.0.0–172.31.255.255  
CLASS C: 192.168.0.0–192.168.255.255  
Because the most of the commercially available routers  
are set to a CLASS C IP address, specify a CLASS C IP  
address for the DTR-7.4.  
a. Proxy Server  
Sets whether the DTR-7.4 connects to Internet radio  
station through proxy server or not.  
On: Connects to Internet radio station through Proxy  
Server.  
Off: Connects to Internet radio station without Proxy  
Server.  
c. SUBNET Mask  
You will enter this value when you set the a. DHCP/  
AUTO IP setting above to Off.  
Enter the subnet mask. If your DTR-7.4 is directly con-  
nected with an xDSL modem or terminal adapter, be  
b. Proxy Address  
Enter the domain name of the proxy server.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio—Continued  
When you set a. Proxy Server to On, select this menu  
On: Leaves the network connection open.  
Off: Closes the network connection while the  
DTR-7.4 is in the standby state. You can save power  
consumption during standby state.  
item and press the Enter or  
enters the character-entry mode.  
Select a character using the  
button, the DTR-7.4  
/
/
/
buttons, and  
press the Enter button to enter the character.  
After all the necessary characters are entered, the  
DTR-7.4 exits the character-entry mode.  
c. NTSP Port  
You can change the TCP/IP port number used for com-  
municating with the Network Audio Server. Be sure to  
match the port number set here with the port number set  
on the Network Audio Server. When you change the  
port number settings, press the  
NTSP Port Input menu.  
c. Proxy Port  
Enter the port number of the proxy server.  
When you set a. Proxy Server to On, select this menu  
button to display the  
item and press the Enter or  
button, the DTR-7.4  
Select a number using the  
/
buttons, and press the  
enters the number-entry mode.  
Enter button to enter the number.  
Select a number using the  
/
/
/
buttons, and  
After all the necessary numbers are entered, the  
DTR-7.4 exits the number-entry mode.  
press the Enter button to enter the number.  
After all the necessary numbers are entered, the  
DTR-7.4 exits the number-entry mode.  
After the necessary settings are complete, press the  
Return button to go back to “5. Network Setup  
Menu,” select “Save Settings,” and press the Enter  
button to save the setting you made.  
Note:  
After setting, allow approx. 2 seconds until the DTR-7.4  
stores all of the data in the memory. Be sure not to turn  
off the power during that time otherwise the data will be  
lost.  
Never turn off the DTR-7.4 while saving the settings.  
Input Setup Menu  
MAC Address Sub-menu  
The illustrations used here represent the remote control-  
ler. When you perform the procedures on the DTR-7.4,  
use the corresponding buttons on the front panel.  
You can view the assigned MAC address. Every net-  
work port is identified by a unique MAC address (This  
is read-only information).  
123456789012345678901234  
Press the Input button, and  
then roll the scroll wheel to select  
either IRD or MSRV.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
5-3.MAC Address  
1
Input  
a.MAC Address  
:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the Setup button.  
2
a. MAC Address  
When the “Basic Menu” is displayed,  
select “Advanced Menu” using the  
and cursor buttons and press the  
Enter button to display the “Advanced  
Menu.”  
Displays the MAC address assigned to your DTR-7.4.  
Client Sub-menu  
A client is a device that receives information from a  
sever. One server can serve multiple clients.  
Throughout this guide, the term “client” refers to your  
DTR-7.4.  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select 2. Input Setupand then  
press the Enter button.  
3
5-4.Client Setup  
The “Input Setup” menu appears.  
Enter  
a.Client Name  
:DTR-7.4/XXXXXX  
b.Wakeup on LAN  
:Off  
c.NTSP Port  
:XXXXXX  
Advanced Menu  
2.Input Setup  
Quit:[SETUP]  
1.Music Server  
2.Playback OSD Display  
3.Video Setup  
4.IntelliVolume  
5.Listening Mode Preset  
Enter  
a. Client Name  
Shows the name used on the Network Audio Server.  
The client name has already been set by the DTR-7.4.  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
b. Wakeup on LAN (Network connection status)  
Sets whether to leave the network connection open or not  
while the DTR-7.4 is in the standby state.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio—Continued  
Hint:  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
4
Procedures for the other setup menus are same as other  
input sources. For details, see the following pages.  
select the sub-menu that you want  
to enter and then press the Enter  
button.  
Video Setup Sub-menu page 38  
IntelliVolume Sub-menu page 53  
Listening Mode Preset Sub-menu page 56  
Use the and cursor buttons to  
select an item and then use the  
5
and  
cursor buttons to set the  
desired value.  
Press the Setup button to return to  
the main menu.  
6
Music Server Sub-menu  
2-1.Music Server  
Input:NET A  
a.Select Server  
:My PC-ABCDE  
OK  
Quit:[SETUP]  
a. Select Server  
Select a Network Audio Server that exists on the net-  
work.  
* mark appears to the servers detected on the network.  
If there is a server which does not have * mark, make  
sure that the server is operating.  
After selection, use the button to select “OK,” and  
press the Enter button to confirm your selection.  
Playback OSD Display Sub-menu  
2-2.Playback OSD Display  
Input:NET A  
a.Playback OSD Display  
:Full  
Quit:[SETUP]  
The Playback OSD Display sub-menu allows you to  
select the way the information on the currently played  
track appears on the OSD.  
a. Playback OSD Display  
Full: Select this when you want to have the OSD dis-  
play the information on the currently played track.  
Simple: Displays the current track information sum-  
mary in two lines.  
Off: Select this when you do not want to have the infor-  
mation displayed on the OSD.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio—Continued  
/
/
/
Setup/Enter/Return/Cursor  
Press the Enter button.  
Wait while your requested data is down-  
load from the XiVA Internet Radio Ser-  
vice.  
4
Display  
Dimmer  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Setup  
Enter  
Tuning  
Standby  
Return  
Enter  
Preset  
Direct  
/
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Memory  
FM Mode  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
A-FORM Listening Mode Memory  
Clear  
* What is the XiVA Internet Radio  
Service?  
Phones  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Video  
5
Input  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Audio  
Selector  
1
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DTR-7.4  
The XiVA Internet Radio Service pro-  
vides tuning information, allowing  
you to select from a large number of  
stations. You can find Internet Radio  
Stations based on your interests,  
musical taste, language and location.  
Net Audio  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
Input  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
When Genres is selected:  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
Allow a few moment until the Genre  
menu appears. When the main list of  
Custom  
Scroll wheel  
Input  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Input  
Sleep  
Mode  
Dimmer  
genres appears, use the  
/
buttons to  
TV  
Input  
+
select the genre desired. Pressing the  
Enter button brings up the sub-list of the  
genre you selected, which prompts you  
to further select one of the items using  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
CH/Disc +/–  
Enter,  
/ /  
-
/
Display  
Display  
Muting  
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
the  
/
buttons.  
A-B  
Pure  
A
Direct  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
-
Level  
+
When Location is selected:  
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Genre  
Re-EQ  
L
Caps  
Location  
The list containing names of countries  
-
RC 550M  
appears. Use the  
the desired item.  
/
buttons to select  
Enjoying Internet Radio  
When Language is selected:  
The list of languages appears. Use the  
To listen to Internet radio, the connection/configuration  
requirements listed on pages 72, 73 and 76-78 must be  
satisfied.  
/
buttons to select your desired  
item.  
If no list is found, “No List” appears.  
You can return from this screen to the  
previous selection screen by pressing the  
button.  
While either the Input button  
1
nor Mode button is illuminated,  
rolling the scroll wheel to select  
IRD (Internet Radio).  
“NET-T” appears on the bottom line.  
On the DTR-7.4, press the Net Audio  
button. This button switches between  
two alternative settings: Server and  
Internet Radio.  
Press the Enter button.  
You are presented with a list of radio sta-  
tion names.  
5
6
Enter  
Press the Display button on the  
remote controller.  
If the main menu has been already dis-  
played, go to the next step.  
2
Use the  
/
buttons to select one  
of the radio stations.  
You can return to the previous step by  
pressing the  
button.  
Enter  
Use the  
/
buttons to select one  
3
of the main menu; Genres, Loca-  
tion, or Language.  
To cancel, press the  
button.  
Enter  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio—Continued  
Choosing a preset Internet radio station  
Press the Enter button.  
Buffering starts with the following mes-  
sage displayed.  
7
While either the Input button nor Mode  
1
button is illuminated, rolling the scroll  
wheel to select IRD (Internet Radio).  
Enter  
When the buffering is complete, the  
DTR-7.4 starts playback of the broad-  
cast.  
Use the remote controllers  
CH/Disc +/button to select the  
preset.  
When you choose a preset station, the  
station name is displayed for 5 seconds,  
and then the progress of buffering is dis-  
played instead.  
2
+
Note:  
CH  
If you’re using a narrowband Internet  
connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN),  
depending on the station, Internet radio  
may not work satisfactorily. Use a  
broadband connection for best results  
(e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc).  
You can switch the displayed content  
Disc  
-
using the  
/
buttons.  
After the switch operation, the display  
mode appears for 3 seconds, and then  
the appropriate information scrolls.  
If there is no information on title or art-  
ist, “No Info” appears.  
When the progress of buffering reaches  
100%, you will be presented with the  
playing screen.  
When using the OSD screen, all the  
information is displayed on one screen  
without scrolling.  
Erasing a preset Internet radio station  
Select the station to erase, follow-  
ing the instructions described  
above.  
OSD iNet Radio Station ONK  
7ch  
1
Title:  
Station ONK Live  
Program:  
Station ONK Live  
Artist:  
RealOnkyoNet.com  
Data:  
Press the  
button.  
2
WMA 20kbps  
Tuned  
ch  
Enter  
Display  
The DTR-7.4 enters into preset erase  
mode.  
Presetting Internet radio stations  
Press the Enter button.  
Your selected station is erased.  
3
You can preset up to 30 Internet radio stations.  
Receive your desired station.  
1
Enter  
Press the  
button.  
2
The DTR-7.4 enters into preset mode;  
the currently selected preset number  
flickers for 5 seconds.  
Enter  
Preset number  
ch  
Press the Enter button.  
The preset is now complete.  
3
Enter  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio—Continued  
“Disconnected”  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
The Network Audio Server may not start  
or the server connected last time may not  
be found. Confirm the connections  
between router, the Network Audio  
Server and the DTR-7.4. Start the Net-  
work Audio Server or select another  
server referring to “Select Server” on  
“Music Server Sub-menu” (See page 79).  
1
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
4
5
6
Number/letter  
buttons  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
-- ---  
0
/
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Scroll wheel  
Input  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone  
2
Input  
Sleep  
Mode  
Enter,  
Dimmer  
TV  
Input  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
/ /  
/
-
Display  
Display  
Muting  
,
,
,
,
,
,
Rec  
Step/Slow  
Random  
Press the  
button to play the  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
4
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
Repeat  
Album  
Playlist  
Random  
Artist  
Genre  
A-B  
music le.  
The DTR-7.4 provides five normal dis-  
Pure  
A
Direct  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
-
Level  
+
Remote  
controller  
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Genre  
Re-EQ  
L
Caps  
Location  
-
RC 550M  
play modes; you can use the  
ton to switch among them.  
/
but-  
OSD  
Music Server  
Play  
Playing a Music File Saved on the Net-  
work Audio Server  
Track: 1/12  
1m20s>  
My sweet candy  
Album:  
My Best 100  
Artist:  
To play music files saved on your PC, the requirements  
listed on page 72 must be satisfied.  
Happy PanPot  
Data:  
MP3 160kbps  
Turn on the Network Audio Server.  
Wait for a while until the Network  
Audio Server starts up.  
1
Display  
It may take a second.  
To stop playback:  
Press the button on the remote controller.  
To pause playback:  
Turn on the DTR-7.4.  
2
When you connect the DTR-7.4 to the net-  
work the first time, it will be connected to  
the first server found.  
Press the  
button on the remote controller.  
To select a track:  
Press the  
Press the  
Press the  
/
button on the remote controller.  
button to move to the next track.  
button to move to the beginning of the  
While either the Input button nor  
3
Mode button is illuminated,  
rolling the scroll wheel to select  
MSRV (Music Server).  
current track; hold down the  
the previous track.  
button to move to  
You can also use the number/letter buttons to select a  
track.  
ex.  
“NET-T” appears on the bottom line.  
On the DTR-7.4, press the Net Audio but-  
ton. This button switches between two alter-  
native settings: Server and Internet Radio.  
Until the DTR-7.4 connects to the net-  
work, finds the server and completes the  
connection, “Network Starting...” and  
“Connecting...” appears. After complet-  
ing the connection to the NetworkAudio  
Server, the display changes to the nor-  
mal indication.  
To select number 3, press 3.  
To select number 10, press --/---, 1 and 0.  
To select number 37, press --/---, 3 and 7.  
To select number 123, press --/--- twice, and then  
press 1, 2 and 3.  
To select number 2568, press --/--- third, and then  
press 2, 5, 6, and 8.  
To fast-forward/reverse the music:  
Press and hold the  
button on the remote control-  
If the following messages appear, check  
the message meaning and perform the  
appropriate procedures.  
ler to fast-forward the music; press and hold the  
button to fast-reverse the music. When the music is  
rewound to the beginning, normal playing starts.  
To switch to the track list:  
“No Track”  
The Network Audio Server could not  
retrieve any track information. Register  
tracks with the Network Audio Server.  
If you have already registered tracks, use  
the Display, Artist, Album, Genre, and  
Playlist buttons to display information.  
While playing the music, you can press the  
to display a list of currently open tracks.  
button  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying Net Audio—Continued  
Selecting a track list  
Upper case (A) Lower case (a) Numeric value (2)  
... When your desired input type is selected, then  
press the number/letter button.  
Let us take the 2ABC button as an example to see how it  
can be operated.  
You can use the music file data saved on the Network  
Audio Server to select which tracks to play.  
For example, you can:  
• Select a track list based on the album name  
• Select a track list based on the artist name  
• Select a track list based on the genre name  
• Select a play list  
When the upper case is selected:  
Pressing the button once will perform the search by the  
letter “A.” Pressing twice will do the search by “B,”  
pressing three times by “C.”  
When the lower case is selected:  
Press either the Album, Artist,  
Genre or Playlist button on the  
remote controller.  
Search the tracks stored on the Network  
Audio Server with your selected mode to  
display it in the display.  
In the artist and album modes, the tracks  
are displayed in alphabetical order.  
You can also use the procedure below.  
1. Press the Display button.  
1
Pressing the button once will perform the search by the  
letter “a.” Pressing twice will do the search by “b,”  
pressing three times by “c.”  
When the numeric value is selected:  
Pressing the button once will perform the search by the  
numeric value “2.”  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Album  
Level  
-
Level  
+
Playlist  
Artist  
Genre  
To cancel the operation:  
Press the button to return to the previous step.You can can-  
cel the whole operation by pressing the button in step 1.  
2.You can press the  
/
buttons to cycli-  
Notes:  
cally switch among the four modes:  
Albums Artists Genres Playlists.  
3. Press the Enter button.  
• Press the Delete button to delete the entered letter or  
number.  
• Pressing Display button on the main unit will display  
the current listening mode.  
Use the  
/
buttons to select one  
2
Playing a music file at random  
from the menu.  
At this time, pressing  
button brings  
you one step behind where you can  
change the selection you made.  
Press the Random button on the  
remote controller while playing stops.  
Pressing the Random button on the  
Enter  
Random  
Also, pressing  
button in the genre or  
artist selection mode will display a list  
of albums with the genre or artist you  
selected.  
In the album, artist or playlist selection  
mode, using the number/letter buttons  
will accelerate your selecting operation  
(See below).  
remote controller displays the current  
random settings.  
This button switches between two alter-  
native settings: On and Off.  
On: Randomly plays the tracks in the  
currently selected mode.  
Off: Random mode is disabled.  
After the necessary settings are com-  
Press the Enter button.  
The title of your selected track appears.  
You can choose another track by pressing  
plete, press the  
Playing a music file repeatedly  
Press the Repeat button on the  
button.  
3
4
the  
Press the  
ous step.  
/
buttons.  
button to return to the previ-  
Enter  
remote controller.  
Repeat  
Pure A  
You can also select the list number using  
the number/letter buttons.  
Pressing the Repeat button on the  
remote controller displays the current  
repeat settings.  
This button cyclically switches among  
three alternative settings: Repeat 1 →  
All Off.  
Press the Enter button.  
The playback begins.  
Enter  
Repeat 1: Repeats the current track only.  
Repeat All: Repeats the tracks in the  
currently selected mode.  
Repeat Off: Repeat mode is disabled.  
You can operate the DTR-7.4 when  
playing and when stopped.  
Using the number/letter buttons  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
-
Level  
+
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Genre  
Re-EQ  
L
Caps  
Caps  
Location  
The number/letter buttons allow you to input one of the  
letters or numbers printed on their key tops. Pressing the  
Caps button cyclically switches the types of input:  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Onkyo Products Using the Remote  
Controller  
The RC-550M remote controller is a useful tool that can  
Note:  
not only operate the DTR-7.4, but also all the other com-  
While neither the Input button nor Mode button  
ponents of your home theater as well. To operate any  
is illuminated, the scroll wheel changes the input  
component, first press the Mode button on the remote  
source and remote controller mode simulta-  
controller that corresponds to the component that you  
neously (e.g., set the input source and mode to  
wish to control. Then simply press the desired operation  
“DVD.”)  
button and the component will operate accordingly.  
To operate a digital satellite tuner, cable, VCR, or televi-  
sion with the remote controller, first program the signal to  
the button.  
Point the remote controller at the DTR-7.4  
and press the desired operation button.  
3
There are two methods. One method is selecting the  
name of a different brand from the table, entering the  
setting number listed, and calling up the pre-program-  
ming code (See page 89). The other method is sending  
the commands from the other brand’s remote control  
directly into this remote controller (See page 94).  
DVD Mode  
DVD mode is used to control an Integra/Onkyo DVD  
player connected to the DTR-7.4 via  
DVD mode, press the Mode button, and then roll the  
scroll wheel until “DVD” appears on the display.  
. To select  
Operating Onkyo Products Using the  
Connection  
Scroll wheel  
Connecting your  
recorder, DVD player, or cassette recorder to the  
DTR-7.4 via allows you to control your system with  
the DTR-7.4’s remote controller by pointing it at the  
DTR-7.4. This allows you to control components that are  
out of sight, for example, in a cabinet. Since you don’t  
have to enter any special codes, or do any programming,  
-compatible Onkyo CD player, MD  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
Input  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
allows you to control these components quickly and  
easily. See page 26 for connection information.  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
0
-- ---  
/
Direct Tuning  
Note:  
Custom  
To use the  
function, you must make an  
connec-  
tion and an analog RCA/phono connection between the  
AV component and your DTR-7.4, even if they are con-  
nected digitally.  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone2  
Input  
Dimmer  
Sleep  
Custom  
TV  
Input  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone2  
Input  
+
Dimmer  
Sleep  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
-
Mode button Scroll wheel  
Display  
Muting  
Press the Mode button.  
1
2
Step/Slow  
Rec  
Random  
Roll the scroll wheel to select your favor-  
ite mode.  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Pure A  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
• When operating the Onkyo cassette tape deck,  
press the Mode button.  
-
A B  
Direct  
• When operating the Integra/Onkyo DVD  
player, select “DVD.”  
• When operating the Integra/Onkyo CD player,  
select “CD.”  
• When operating the Onkyo MD player, select  
“MD.”  
-
+
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Level  
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Artist  
L Night  
Genre  
-
Re EQ  
Caps  
Language  
Location  
-
RC 550M  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller—Continued  
1 On button  
F Repeat button  
This button is used to turn on the DVD player.  
This button is used to set the repeat playback func-  
tions.  
2 Standby button  
G A-B button  
This button is used to set the DVD player to  
Standby.  
This button is used to set the A–B repeat playback  
function.  
3 Number/letter buttons  
These buttons are used to enter title, chapter, and  
track numbers and to enter times for locating spe-  
cific points in time.  
H Open/Close button  
This button is used to open and close the disc tray.  
I LIGHT button  
4 Mode button  
This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-  
troller’s illuminated buttons.  
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,  
and then roll the scroll wheel until “DVD” appears  
on the display.  
J Input button  
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
“DVD” appears on the display.  
5 Top Menu button  
This button is used to select a DVD’s top menu.  
K Menu button  
6 Up/Down/Left/Right  
/
/
/
& Enter  
This button is used to select a DVD’s menu.  
buttons  
L VOL  
button  
These buttons are used to navigate DVD menus and  
the DVD player’s onscreen setup menus. The Enter  
button is used to start playback of the selected menu  
title, chapter, or track and to confirm settings.  
This button is used to set the volume of the  
DTR-7.4.  
M Setup/Guide button  
This button is used to access the DVD player’s  
onscreen setup menus.  
7 CH/Disc +/button  
This button is used to select discs on a DVD changer.  
N Muting button  
8 Return/Exit button  
This button is used to mute the DTR-7.4. This func-  
tion can be set only with the remote controller.  
This button is used to exit the DVD player’s  
onscreen setup menu and to restart menu playback.  
O Play  
button  
9 Display button  
This button is used to start DVD playback.  
This button is used to display information about the  
current disc, title, chapter, or track, including the  
elapsed time, remaining time, total time, and so on.  
P Stop  
button  
This button is used to stop DVD playback.  
0 Previous/Next  
/
buttons  
Q Random button  
This button is used with the random playback func-  
tion.  
The Previous  
vious chapter or track. During playback it selects  
the beginning of the current chapter or track. The  
button is used to select the pre-  
R Angle button  
This button is used to select different camera angles.  
Next  
button is used to select the next chapter or  
track.  
S Last Memory button  
This button is used with the last memory function,  
which allows you to resume DVD playback from  
where you left off.  
A FR/FF  
The FR  
FF  
/
buttons  
button is used to start fast reverse. The  
button is used to start fast forward.  
T Memory button  
This button is used with the memory playback func-  
tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of  
titles, chapters, or tracks.  
B Pause  
button  
This button is used to pause DVD playback.  
C Step/Slow buttons  
/
U Search button  
These buttons are used for frame-by-frame play-  
back and slow-motion playback.  
This button is used to search for titles, chapters,  
tracks, and specific points in time.  
D Subtitle button  
V Clear button  
This button is used to select subtitles.  
This button is used to cancel functions and to clear  
entered numbers.  
E Audio button  
This button is used to select foreign language  
soundtracks and audio formats (e.g., Dolby Digital  
or DTS).  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller—Continued  
Boxed numbers are for MiniDisc mode (page 87).  
CD Mode  
1 On button  
CD mode is used to control an Integra/Onkyo CD  
This button is used to set the CD player to On or  
Standby.  
player connected to the DTR-7.4 via  
mode, press the Mode button, and then roll the scroll  
wheel until “CD” appears on the display.  
. To select CD  
2 Number/letter buttons  
These buttons are used to enter track numbers and  
to enter times for locating specific points in time.  
Note:  
While neither the Input button nor Mode button is illu-  
minated, the scroll wheel changes the input source  
and remote controller mode simultaneously (e.g., set the  
input source and mode to “CD.”)  
3 Mode button  
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,  
and then roll the scroll wheel until “CD” appears on  
the display.  
Scroll wheel  
4 CH/Disc +/button  
This button is used to select discs on a CD changer.  
5 Display button  
This button is used to display information about the  
current disc or track, including the elapsed time,  
remaining time, total time, and so on.  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
Input  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
6 Previous/Next  
/
buttons  
4
5
6
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
The Previous  
button is used to select the previ-  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
ous track. During playback it selects the beginning  
+
10  
Clear  
0
-- ---  
/
Direct Tuning  
of the current track. The Next  
select the next track.  
button is used to  
Custom  
7 FR/FF  
The FR  
FF  
/
buttons  
button is used to start fast reverse. The  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone2  
Input  
Dimmer  
Sleep  
button is used to start fast forward.  
TV  
Input  
8 Pause  
button  
+
This button is used to pause CD playback.  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
9 Repeat button  
-
This button is used to set the repeat playback func-  
tions.  
Display  
Muting  
0 Open/Close button  
This button is used to open and close the disc tray.  
Step/Slow  
Rec  
Random  
A LIGHT button  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Pure A  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-  
troller’s illuminated buttons.  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
-
A B  
Direct  
B Input button  
-
+
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Level  
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
“CD” appears on the display.  
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Artist  
L Night  
Genre  
-
Re EQ  
Caps  
Language  
Location  
-
RC 550M  
C VOL  
button  
This button is used to set the volume of the  
DTR-7.4.  
D Muting button  
This button is used to mute the DTR-7.4. This func-  
tion can be set only with the remote controller.  
E Play  
button  
This button is used to start CD playback.  
F Stop  
button  
This button is used to stop CD playback.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller—Continued  
G Random button  
0Eject button  
This button is used with the random playback func-  
tion.  
This button is used to set eject the MiniDisc.  
ALIGHT button  
H Memory button  
This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-  
troller’s illuminated buttons.  
This button is used with the memory playback func-  
tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of  
tracks.  
BInput button  
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
“MD” appears on the display.  
I Clear button  
This button is used to cancel functions and to clear  
entered numbers.  
CVOL  
button  
This button is used to set the volume of the  
DTR-7.4.  
MiniDisc Mode  
MiniDisc mode is used to control an Onkyo MiniDisc  
DMuting button  
recorder connected to the DTR-7.4 via  
. To select  
This button is used to mute the DTR-7.4. This func-  
tion can be set only with the remote controller.  
MiniDisc mode, press the Mode button, and then roll  
the scroll wheel until “MD” appears on the display.  
EPlay  
button  
Note:  
This button is used to start MiniDisc playback.  
While neither the Input button nor Mode button is illu-  
minated, the scroll wheel changes the input source  
and remote controller mode simultaneously (e.g., set the  
input source and mode to “MD.”)  
FStop  
button  
This button is used to stop MiniDisc playback.  
GRandom button  
1On button  
This button is used with the random playback func-  
tion.  
This button is used to set the MiniDisc recorder to  
On or Standby.  
HMemory button  
2Number/letter buttons  
This button is used with the memory playback func-  
tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of  
tracks.  
These buttons are used to enter track numbers and  
to enter times for locating specific points in time.  
3Mode button  
IClear button  
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,  
and then roll the scroll wheel until “MD” appears  
on the display.  
This button is used to cancel functions and to clear  
entered numbers.  
4Display button  
This button is used to display information about the  
current disc or track, including the elapsed time,  
remaining time, total time, and so on.  
5Previous/Next  
/
buttons  
The Previous  
button is used to select the previ-  
ous track. During playback it selects the beginning  
of the current track. The Next  
select the next track.  
button is used to  
6FR/FF  
The FR  
FF  
/
buttons  
button is used to start fast reverse. The  
button is used to start fast forward.  
7Pause  
button  
This button is used to pause MiniDisc playback.  
8Rec G button  
This button is used to start MiniDisc recording.  
9Repeat button  
This button is used to set the repeat playback func-  
tions.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller—Continued  
1 Mode button  
Tape Mode  
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
Tape mode is used to control an Onkyo cassette  
the remote controller modes. Press the scroll wheel  
until “AMP” appears on the display.  
recorder connected to the DTR-7.4 via  
Tape mode, press the scroll wheel until “AMP”  
appears on the display.  
. To select  
2 Previous/Next  
/
buttons  
The Previous  
button is used to select the previ-  
Note:  
ous track. During playback it selects the beginning  
While neither the Input button nor Mode button is illu-  
minated, the scroll wheel changes the input source and  
remote controller mode simultaneously (e.g., set the  
input source and mode to “TAPE.”)  
of the current track. The Next  
select the next track.  
button is used to  
The Previous/Next  
/
buttons make not work  
properly with some cassette tapes depending on  
how they were recorded.  
Scroll wheel  
3 Rewind/FF  
/
buttons  
The Rewind  
button is used to start rewind. The  
FF  
button is used to start fast forward.  
On  
1
Standby  
TV  
4 Rec G button  
Input  
This button is used to start tape recording.  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
5 LIGHT button  
4
5
6
This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-  
troller’s illuminated buttons.  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
+
Clear  
10  
0
6 Input button  
-- ---  
/
Direct Tuning  
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
TAPE” appears on the display.  
Custom  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone2  
Input  
7 VOL  
button  
Dimmer  
Sleep  
This button is used to set the volume of the  
DTR-7.4.  
TV  
Input  
+
8 Muting button  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
This button is used to mute the DTR-7.4. This func-  
tion can be set only with the remote controller.  
-
8 Play  
button  
Display  
Muting  
This button is used to start tape playback.  
0 Stop  
button  
Step/Slow  
Rec  
Random  
This button is used to stop tape playback.  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Pure A  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
A Reverse Play  
button  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
This button is used to start reverse playback.  
-
A B  
Direct  
-
+
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Level  
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Artist  
L Night  
Genre  
-
Re EQ  
Caps  
Language  
Location  
-
RC 550M  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Remote Controller with Other  
Components  
You can use the DTR-7.4’s remote controller (RC-  
Use the number buttons to enter  
the 4-digit remote control code.  
5
550M) to control your other AV components, including  
those made by other manufacturers. To do this you can:  
• Enter a remote control code for the component that  
you want to control (e.g., DVD, TV, VCR).  
• Learn commands directly from the other component’s  
remote controller (see page 94).  
• Use the Macro function to learn a sequence of actions  
(see page 95).  
You can also edit the remote controller modes (see  
page 97).  
If the code is accepted, the following  
appears on the display for a while, and  
then the normal display reappears.  
Entering a Remote Control Code  
If the code is not accepted, after the  
message “RETRY” has been displayed,  
the code entry display reappears, and  
you should try entering the code again.  
To cancel this procedure at any point,  
press the Custom button.  
By entering the appropriate remote control code for  
each of your components, you can control each compo-  
nent by selecting the relevant remote controller mode:  
DVD, TV, VCR, CBL (cable), or SAT (satellite).  
Look up the appropriate remote  
1
control code for the component.  
See “Remote Control Codes” on page  
90-91.  
Select the remote controller mode,  
point the remote controller at the  
component, and check its opera-  
tion.  
The remote controller buttons that can  
be used in DVD mode are shown on  
page 84. Those that can be used with the  
TV, VCR, CBL, and SAT modes are  
listed on pages 92 and 93.  
6
Press and hold down the Custom  
button for more than three sec-  
2
Custom  
onds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
PRGRM,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
Remote Control Codes for an Onkyo DVD player  
3
The remote control code that you use with an Onkyo  
DVD player depends on whether it’s connected via  
as follows:  
,
5001: Use this code if you’ve connected an  
cable  
and an RCA/phono analog audio connection cable to  
your DVD player. This is the default setting, so if  
you’re using  
, you don’t need to change it. Point  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
4
the remote controller at the DTR-7.4 to operate the  
DVD player.  
5002: Use this code if your DVD player doesn’t have  
the remote controller mode you  
want to use with the component,  
and then press the scroll wheel.  
The following remote controller modes  
can be selected: DVD, TV, VCR, CBL,  
or SAT.  
an  
socket, or you’re not using  
. Point the  
remote controller at the DVD player to operate it.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Remote Control Codes  
CBL (cable receiver)  
VCR  
Manufacturer  
Aiwa  
Akai  
Bell & Howell  
Canon  
Carver  
Citizen  
Colortyme  
Craig  
Manufacturer  
ABC  
Control code  
Control code  
2012  
2003, 2004  
2007  
2010, 2011  
2014  
2008, 2009  
2005  
When two or more codes are given,  
try each one in turn, and choose the  
one that works best.  
3001, 3002  
Archer  
3006  
Cableview  
Contec  
3004  
3009  
Eastern  
GE  
Gemini  
3010  
3001, 3002  
3011  
DVD (DVD Player)  
Manufacturer  
Aiwa  
Control code  
5010  
General  
Instruments  
Hamlin  
2008  
3002  
Apex  
Denon  
GE  
5015, 5016  
5017, 5020  
5003  
2001, 2005, 2008,  
2009, 2010, 2011  
2012  
2001  
2003, 2010, 2012  
2007  
2004, 2010  
2012  
2012  
2001, 2002, 2008,  
2010, 2011  
2005, 2009  
2012  
Curtis Mathes  
3012  
Hitachi  
3002  
Daewoo  
Dimensia  
Emerson  
Fisher  
Fuji  
Funai  
Hitachi  
Integra  
5009  
5001, 5002  
Jerrold  
3002, 3011, 3013  
3014  
3015  
3016  
3003  
Magnavox  
Memorex  
Movie Time  
NEC  
Integra Research 5001, 5002  
JVC  
5023  
Kenwood  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Mitsubishi  
Onkyo  
5017  
5004  
NSC  
3016  
Garrard  
5025, 5026  
5005  
5001, 5002  
5011, 5017, 5020  
5004  
Oak  
3009  
GE  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Proscan  
RCA  
Realistic  
Samsung  
Signature  
Sprucer  
Standard  
Component  
Starcom  
Stargate  
Tocom  
3020  
3007, 3008, 3014  
3017  
3001, 3002  
3004, 3020  
3006  
3017  
3002  
3020  
GoldStar  
Gradiente  
Harman Kardon 2005  
Hitachi  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Proscan  
RCA  
5006  
5003  
5003  
2013  
2005, 2006, 2007,  
2008, 2011, 2013,  
2014  
2013  
2005, 2006, 2007,  
2009  
2005, 2006, 2007,  
2009  
2010  
2010, 2011, 2014  
2005, 2006, 2007,  
2009, 2010, 2014  
2010  
2007, 2008, 2010,  
2012  
2013  
2013  
2010  
2008  
2008, 2012  
2005, 2006, 2007,  
2009  
2008  
2010  
JC Penney  
Sanyo  
5012  
Jensen  
JVC  
Sony  
5007, 5013  
5020  
5022, 5024  
5008  
Technics  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
Xbox  
3018  
3011  
3011  
3013  
Kenwood  
5022  
Kodak  
Magnavox  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
5020  
5014  
Universal  
View Star  
Zenith  
3005, 3006  
3009, 3014, 3016  
3019  
Marantz  
Matsushita  
Memorex  
SAT (satellite receiver)  
Manufacturer  
Dishnet  
Control code  
4008  
Minolta  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
MTC  
Echostar  
GE  
4010  
4001, 4002  
General  
Instruments  
Hughes Network  
Systems  
JVC  
4003  
4011  
Multitech  
NEC  
4009  
NOBLEX  
Olympus  
Optonica  
Panasonic  
Pentax  
Panasonic  
Primestar  
Proscan  
RCA  
4006  
4007  
4001, 4002  
4001, 4002  
4005  
2017  
2010, 2011  
2013  
Sony  
Pentex Research 2009  
Philco  
Toshiba  
4004  
2010, 2011, 2014  
Philips  
Pioneer  
2010, 2014, 2017  
2006, 2013  
2001, 2002  
2010, 2011  
2017  
2007, 2008, 2010,  
2011, 2012, 2017  
2001, 2002, 2003,  
2008, 2010, 2013  
2007, 2008, 2010,  
2011, 2012, 2017  
2008  
Proscan  
Quasar  
Radio Shack  
Radio Shack/  
Realistic  
RCA  
Realistic  
Samsung  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
Scott  
2006  
2007, 2008  
2015  
Sears  
Sharp  
Shintom  
Singer  
Sony  
2007, 2010, 2013  
2016, 2017  
2004  
2010  
2004, 2018  
2010  
STS  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
VCR  
TV  
TV  
Manufacturer  
Control code  
2010, 2011, 2012,  
2014  
2012  
2007  
2012  
2010  
2010, 2012  
2013, 2015  
2008  
Manufacturer  
Akai  
Control code  
1002  
1009  
1003, 1009  
1004, 1005, 1006  
1009  
1010, 1017  
1002  
1004, 1006, 1009,  
1017  
1004, 1006  
1007, 1009  
1009  
Manufacturer  
Control code  
1003, 1004, 1005,  
1006, 1007, 1008,  
1014, 1018  
1003, 1004, 1007,  
1008, 1014, 1018  
1004, 1006  
1004, 1005, 1006  
1012  
1001  
Sylvania  
Philco  
Amtron  
Anam National  
AOC  
Audiovox  
Bell & Howell  
Celebrity  
Symphonic  
Tandy  
Teac  
Technics  
Teknika  
Toshiba  
Totevision  
Unitech  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Portland  
Prism  
Proscan  
Proton  
Citizen  
1004, 1006, 1007  
1003, 1012  
1010, 1017  
2008  
Colortyme  
Contec/Cony  
Craig  
Quasar  
Radio Shack  
Vector Research 2005, 2006  
Video Concepts 2005, 2006  
1001, 1004, 1006,  
1007, 1009, 1010,  
1017  
1001, 1003, 1004,  
1005, 1006, 1008  
1010, 1017  
1004, 1006  
1004, 1005, 1006,  
1007, 1008  
2008, 2010, 2012,  
Crown  
1009, 1014  
1001, 1004, 1006,  
1010, 1017  
1004, 1005, 1006  
1004, 1006  
1001  
1004  
1002  
1002, 1003, 1004,  
1006, 1008  
1004, 1006, 1007,  
1009, 1010, 1017,  
1029  
Radio Shack/  
Realistic  
Wards  
2013, 2017  
2010, 2012  
2005, 2006, 2007,  
2009  
Curtis Mathes  
XR-12000  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
Daewoo  
Daytron  
Dimensia  
Dumont  
Electroband  
RCA  
Realistic  
Sampo  
2004  
Samsung  
Electrohome  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
1029  
1004, 1010, 1017  
1004, 1006, 1007,  
1009  
Emerson  
Scott  
1001, 1004, 1006,  
1008, 1010, 1015,  
1016, 1017  
1004, 1006, 1007  
1002, 1030, 1032  
1004, 1006, 1009  
1009  
1004, 1006, 1008,  
1014, 1018  
1009  
Envision  
Fisher  
Fujitsu  
Funai  
1004, 1006  
1010, 1017  
1070  
Sears  
Sharp  
Sony  
Soundesign  
Starlite  
1009  
1001, 1003, 1004,  
1006, 1011, 1012  
1004, 1005, 1006,  
1007, 1008  
1004, 1006  
1004, 1006, 1007,  
1013  
GE  
GoldStar  
Hallmark  
Hitachi  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
Tatung  
Technics  
Techwood  
1003  
1012  
Infinity  
JBL  
1014  
1014  
1004, 1006, 1012  
1004, 1005, 1006,  
1007, 1009  
1010, 1016, 1017  
1011  
1001, 1004, 1005,  
1006, 1008, 1011,  
1014, 1018  
1004, 1005, 1006,  
1008  
1001, 1004, 1005,  
1006, 1011, 1012,  
1016  
1004, 1006  
1007, 1012, 1013,  
1015  
Teknika  
JC Penney  
Toshiba  
Universal  
Jensen  
JVC  
Wards  
Kawasho  
Kenwood  
Kloss Novabeam 1009  
1002, 1004, 1006  
1004, 1006, 1008  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
1004  
KTV  
1009  
LG  
1005  
Loewe  
Luxman  
1014  
1004, 1006  
1001, 1006, 1010,  
1014, 1016, 1017  
1004, 1006, 1008,  
1014, 1018  
1004, 1006, 1014  
1006  
LXI  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Megatron  
1005, 1006, 1010,  
1017  
1004, 1005, 1006,  
1008  
Memorex  
MGA  
1004, 1005, 1006,  
1008  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
MTC  
Multitech  
NAD  
1003  
1004, 1005, 1006  
1009  
1006  
1003, 1004, 1005,  
1006  
NEC  
Nikko  
1006  
Onwa  
1009  
Orion  
1029  
Panasonic  
1003, 1012, 1014  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Controlling a Satellite Receiver  
Controlling a VCR  
On  
Standby  
On  
Standby  
TV  
TV  
On,  
On,  
Standby  
Input  
Input  
Standby  
1
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
4
5
6
4
5
6
Number  
buttons  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
TV VOL  
+
10  
Clear  
+
10  
Clear  
0
0
-- ---  
/
-- ---  
/
Direct Tuning  
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Custom  
Scroll wheel  
Scroll wheel  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone2  
Input  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone2  
Input  
Mode  
Mode  
Dimmer  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
Sleep  
TV  
TV  
Input  
Input  
Enter  
+
+
CH  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Enter  
VOL  
CH/Disc +/–  
CH/Disc +/–  
Disc  
Disc  
VOL /  
VOL /  
-
-
/ /  
/
Muting  
Muting  
Display  
Muting  
Display  
Muting  
Step/Slow  
Step/Slow  
Rec  
Random  
Rec  
Random  
Rec  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
-
-
B
A
B
A
Pure  
A
Direct  
Pure  
A
Direct  
-
+
-
+
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Level  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Level  
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
Genre  
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
Genre  
-
-
L
Re EQ  
L
Re EQ  
Caps  
Location  
Caps  
Location  
-
-
RC 550M  
RC 550M  
1. Press the Mode button, and then roll the scroll  
wheel to select “SAT.”  
1. Press the Mode button, and then roll the scroll  
wheel to select “VCR.”  
2. Point the remote controller at your satellite  
receiver, and use the following buttons (you must  
enter appropriate remote control code first).  
2. Point the remote controller at your VCR, and use  
the following buttons (you must enter appropri-  
ate remote control code first).  
Set the satellite receiver to On or  
Standby  
On, Standby  
Set the VCR to On or Standby  
Select TV channels  
On, Standby  
CH/Disc +/–  
CH/Disc +/–  
Select satellite channels  
Select menu items  
Play  
/
/
/
Stop  
Enter  
Confirm selection  
Enter numbers  
Rewind  
Fast forward  
Number buttons  
The following buttons control the DTR-7.4.  
Pause  
Adjust the DTR-7.4 volume  
Mute the DTR-7.4  
VOL  
Record  
REC G  
Muting  
-
The following buttons control the DTR 7.4.  
Adjust the DTR-7.4 volume  
Mute the DTR-7.4  
VOL  
Muting  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Controlling a TV  
Controlling a Cable Receiver  
On  
1
Standby  
On  
Standby  
TV  
TV  
On,  
On,  
Input  
Input  
*
Standby  
Standby  
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
TV CH +/*  
4
5
6
4
5
6
Number  
buttons  
Number  
buttons  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
9
7
8
9
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
TV VOL  
TV VOL  
TV VOL / *  
+
10  
Clear  
+
10  
Clear  
0
0
-- ---  
/
-- ---  
/
Direct Tuning  
Direct Tuning  
Custom  
Custom  
Scroll wheel  
Scroll wheel  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone2  
Input  
Macro  
Mode  
Zone2  
Input  
Mode  
Mode  
Dimmer  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
Sleep  
TV Input  
TV  
Input  
TV  
Input  
+
+
CH  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Enter  
VOL  
CH/Disc +/–  
CH/Disc +/–  
Disc  
Disc  
VOL /  
VOL /  
-
-
/ /  
/
Muting  
Muting  
Display  
Muting  
Display  
Muting  
Step/Slow  
Step/Slow  
Rec  
Random  
Rec  
Random  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
Audio  
Surround  
Repeat  
Subtitle  
THX  
Angle Last Memory  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
All CH ST  
Search  
DSP  
Stereo  
Memory  
DSP  
-
-
B
A
B
A
Pure  
A
Direct  
Pure  
A
Direct  
-
+
-
+
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Level  
Test Tone  
CH SEL  
Level  
Level  
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
Genre  
Playlist  
Album  
Audio SEL  
Delete  
Artist  
Night  
Language  
Genre  
-
-
L
Re EQ  
L
Re EQ  
Caps  
Location  
Caps  
Location  
-
-
RC 550M  
RC 550M  
1. Press the Mode button, and then roll the scroll  
wheel to select “TV.”  
1. Press the Mode button, and then roll the scroll  
wheel to select “CBL.”  
2. Point the remote controller at your TV, and use  
the following buttons (you must enter appropri-  
ate remote control code first).  
2. Point the remote controller at your cable  
receiver, and use the following buttons (you must  
enter appropriate remote control code first).  
On, Standby  
Set the TV to On or Standby  
TV on/off  
Set the cable receiver to On or  
Standby  
On, Standby  
TV  
CH/Disc +/–  
Select cable channels  
Enter numbers  
TV CH +/–  
Number buttons  
CH/Disc +/–  
TV Input  
Select TV channels  
Enter numbers  
Number buttons  
Select cable channels  
Select TV or VCR input  
-
The following buttons control the DTR 7.4.  
Adjust the DTR-7.4 volume  
Mute the DTR-7.4  
VOL  
Adjust the TV volume  
TV VOL  
Muting  
* Buttons marked with an asterisk can always be used to con-  
trol a TV regardless of the currently selected remote control-  
ler mode. These buttons do not work with the additional TV  
modes.  
The following buttons control the DTR-7.4.  
Adjust the DTR-7.4 volume  
Mute the DTR-7.4  
VOL  
Muting  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Learning Commands from Another  
Remote Controller  
Point the remote controllers at  
each other, about 2 to 6 inches (5–  
15 cm) apart, and then, on the  
other remote controller, press the  
button whose command you want  
to learn.  
When the command has been learnt suc-  
cessfully, OKappears on the display.  
You may need to press the button several  
times.  
5
You can teach the DTR-7.4s remote controller new  
commands simply by transmitting commands from  
another remote controller one at time. For example, by  
transmitting the Play and Stop commands from your  
CD players remote controller, the DTR-7.4s remote  
controller can be taught to transmit those commands  
when its Play  
mode.  
and Stop  
buttons are pressed in CD  
This is convenient when you want to add commands to  
buttons after entering a remote control code (page 89).  
If the command is not learnt success-  
fully, after the message FAILhas been  
displayed, the mode select display reap-  
pears (step 3), and you should try again.  
Press and hold the Custom button  
for more than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
1
Custom  
To teach the DTR-7.4s remote  
controller more new commands,  
repeat steps 3 through 5.  
Press the Custom button when youve  
nished.  
6
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
LEARN,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
2
Notes:  
The following buttons cannot be taught new com-  
mands: LIGHT, Customs, Macro, Mode, Input, Zone  
2, and the scroll wheel button.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
The DTR-7.4s remote controller can learn a total of  
150 commands. However, the commands of some  
remote controllers may use a lot of memory, in which  
case, this total will be reduced.  
If the message FULLappears, the remote control-  
ler cannot learn any more commands because its  
memory is full.  
3
the remote controller mode you  
want to teach a new command,  
and then press the scroll wheel.  
The following remote controller modes  
can be selected: DVD, TV, VCR, CBL,  
or SAT.  
By default, the DTR-7.4s remote controller knows  
the commands for controlling an Onkyo CD player,  
cassette deck, DVD player, and MD player (e.g.,  
Play, Stop, Pause, etc., buttons). You can teach these  
buttons new commands, although the defaults will be  
restored if the remote controller is reset.  
To teach a new command to a button that has already  
been taught a command, simply repeat this proce-  
dure.  
On the DTR-7.4s remote con-  
troller, press the button you want  
to teach the new command.  
4
Like most remote controllers, the DTR-7.4s remote  
controller uses infrared. Commands from remote  
controllers that dont use infrared cannot be learnt.  
When the remote controllers batteries expire, all  
learnt commands will be lost and will have to learnt  
all over again, so dont discard your other remote  
controllers.  
If you press a button that cannot be  
taught a new command, the message  
RETRYappears and you should press  
another button.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Using Macros  
On the remote controller,press the  
buttons whose actions you want to  
program into the macro in the  
order you want them performed.  
To program the CD example in the left  
column into a macro: press the scroll  
wheel, press the On button, roll the  
scroll wheel to select CD, press the  
scroll wheel, and then press the Play  
button.  
5
With the Macro function you can program the remote  
controller to perform a sequence of actions with one  
press of a button. For example, normally you need to  
perform the following actions to use a CD player thats  
connected to the DTR-7.4:  
1. Press the scroll wheel, (to select AMP mode).  
2. Press the On button (to turn on the DTR-7.4).  
3. Roll the scroll wheel to select CD (to select the  
CD remote controller mode and the CD input  
source).  
Actions are numbered from 1 to 8.  
Macro #1 selected  
4. 4. Press the Play  
player).  
button (to start the CD  
With the Macro function you can program the remote  
controller to do all of this with one press of a button.  
8 actions learnt  
Making Macros  
After each button is pressed, SETfol-  
lowed by KEYis displayed.  
You can make up to eight macros, and each macro can  
perform up to eight actions.  
To add an action that selects an input  
source for the main room or Zone 2,  
press the Input button or Zone 2 button,  
respectively, roll the scroll wheel to  
select the input source, and then press  
the scroll wheel.  
Press and hold the Custom button  
for more than three seconds.  
1
Custom  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
When youve nished, press the  
Macro button.  
After the following appears on the dis-  
play, the display returns to normal.  
6
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
MACRO,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
2
Macro  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
EDIT,and then press the scroll  
3
wheel.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select a  
macro, and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
4
Macros are numbered from 1 to 8.  
Macro #1 selected  
Action #1  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Running Macros  
Roll the scroll wheel to select a  
character, and then press the  
scroll wheel to set it.  
The following characters are available.  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K  
L M N O P Q R S T U V W XY Z + – = < >  
_ ¯¯ / \ * space  
5
Programmed macros can be run as follows.  
Press the Macro button.  
1
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
macros number, and then press  
the scroll wheel.  
2
The actions in the macro are per-  
formed in the order in which they were  
programmed.  
Macro #1 selected  
1st character set  
Naming Macros  
Repeat step 5 until youve entered  
all 5 characters.  
You can name your macros as follows. Names may con-  
tain of up to five characters.  
6
The previous menu reappears.  
If the name you are entering consists of  
less than ve characters, enter spaces at  
the end to make it up to ve.  
Press and hold the Custom button  
for more than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
1
Custom  
mode.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
MACRO,and then press the  
Editing Remote Controller Modes  
2
scroll wheel.  
Adding New Remote Controller Modes  
You can add additional modes (DVD, TV, VCR, CBL,  
SAT) to the remote controller. This is useful if, for  
example, you have several DVD players or TVs.  
Press and hold the Custom button  
for more than three seconds.  
1
Custom  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
NAME,and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
3
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
MODE,and then press the scroll  
2
wheel.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
4
number of the macro that you want  
to name, and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
ADD,and then press the scroll  
3
wheel.  
Macro #1 selected  
1st character  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
type of mode you want to add, and  
then press the scroll wheel.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
4
5
mode before which you want to  
insert the specied mode, and  
then press the scroll wheel.  
Here the specied mode will be inserted  
before the VCRmode.  
You can add up to 8 additional modes:  
4 DVD, 2 TV, 1 VCR, and 1 CBL.  
If the move is successful, after OKhas  
been displayed, the SORT display (step  
3) reappears.  
Reordering the Remote Controller Modes  
You can change the order in which the remote controller  
modes appear when you roll the scroll wheel. The posi-  
tion of the AMP mode cannot be changed.  
Press and hold the Custom button  
for more than three seconds.  
1
Custom  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Deleting Remote Controller Modes  
You can delete remote controller modes that you dont  
need, such as modes for components that you dont  
have.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
MODE,and then press the scroll  
2
The AMP mode cannot be deleted.  
wheel.  
Press and hold the Custom button  
for more than three seconds.  
1
Custom  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
MODE,and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
2
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
SORT,and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
3
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
DEL,and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
3
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
mode you want to move, and then  
press the scroll wheel.  
4
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
mode you want to delete, and then  
press the scroll wheel.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
4
5
mode you want to assign to the  
specied input source, and then  
press the scroll wheel.  
If the mode is deleted successfully, after  
OKhas been displayed, the DEL dis-  
play (step 3) reappears.  
If the assignment is successful, after  
OKhas been displayed, the ASSGN  
display (step 3) reappears.  
Assigning Remote Controller Modes  
With this function you can assign a remote controller  
mode to an input source. This is useful when you con-  
nect, say, a CD recorder to the TAPE IN/OUT sockets.  
By assigning the CDR remote controller mode to the  
TAPE input source, you can use the remote controller to  
control the CD recorder.  
Resetting the Remote Controller  
You can reset the remote controller to its default set-  
tings.  
Press and hold the Custom button  
for more than three seconds.  
1
Custom  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Press and hold the Custom button  
for more than three seconds.  
1
Custom  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
MODE,and then press the scroll  
2
wheel.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
MODE,and then press the scroll  
2
wheel.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
RESET,and then press the scroll  
3
wheel.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
ASSGN,and then press the  
3
scroll wheel.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
YES,and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
4
Roll the scroll wheel to select an  
input source, and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
4
The remote controller is reset to its  
default settings.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Guide  
If a problem occurs while you are using the remote controller, rst try to operate the controls on the front panel of the  
DTR-7.4 to make sure that it is not due to a malfunction (or dead batteries) in the remote controller.  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged  
into the wall outlet. Make sure that the other end  
of the power cord is properly connected to the  
DTR-7.4s AC INLET (See page 27).  
Power cord is disconnected.  
No power.  
External noise is affecting the internal  
microcomputer.  
Turn off the power, wait ve seconds, and then  
turn the power back on (See page 27).  
Press the Muting button on the remote controller  
to turn off muting (See page 40).  
Mutingis displayed.  
Power turns on but no  
sound.  
Check connections, speaker cables, and other wir-  
ing (See pages 18 to 26).  
Bad connections or wiring.  
Input selector is not set properly.  
Headphones are connected.  
Set to correct input source (See page 40).  
Sound of playback source  
is not heard.  
Lower volume and then disconnect headphones  
(See page 40).  
Power shuts off immedi-  
ately after power on.  
Remove the power cord from outlet immediately.  
Contact your Onkyo service center.  
Amplier protection circuitry is activated.  
Check the connection between DTR-7.4 and  
speaker (See page 18).  
Speaker cable is not connected.  
Set the Listening mode to any mode other than  
Listening mode is set to Stereo, PureAudio Stereo, Pure Audio or Direct. The output to the  
or Direct.  
center speaker may differ depending on the listen-  
ing mode (See page 44).  
No sound from the center  
speaker, or at very low vol-  
ume.  
Set the center speaker level to the appropriate vol-  
ume (See pages 34, 35).  
Center speaker volume is set to minimum.  
The Center setting is set to None.”  
Set the Center setting to Largeor Smallat  
Setup Menu Speaker Setup Menu Speaker  
Cong Sub-menu (See page 33).  
Set the Subwoofer setting to Yesat Setup Menu  
Speaker Setup Menu Speaker Cong Sub-  
menu (See page 33).  
Subwoofer setting is set to No.”  
No sound or very low vol-  
ume from subwoofer.  
Set the subwoofer level to the appropriate volume  
(See pages 34, 35).  
Subwoofer volume is set to minimum.  
Not properly grounded.  
Check outer conductor of input plugs.  
Low frequency humming  
is heard.  
Turntable motor is not properly grounded. Check for proper ground connection.  
Audio connection cables on the rear panel  
are connected incorrectly.  
Adjust the placement of the cables to reduce hum.  
Howling is heard when the Turntable and speakers are located too  
Move them farther apart.  
volume is turned up.  
close together.  
Turntable needle is dirty or worn, or a  
problem exists with a connected compo-  
nent.  
Refer to the instructions of the connected compo-  
nents and check for problems.  
Rough or scratchy sound is  
heard. High range is not  
clear.  
Turn treble setting down at Setup Menu Audio  
Adjust Menu Tone Control Sub-menu (See  
page 54).  
Treble control is too high.  
AM stations cannot be  
received.  
Connect the included AM loop antenna to the AM  
antenna terminals (See page 14).  
AM loop antenna is not connected.  
Buzzing noise on AM sta-  
tions (particularly notice-  
Move the AM loop antenna to different position.  
Noise from electrical apparatus such as  
able at night or with weak uorescent lamp.  
Set up an outdoor AM antenna (See page 15).  
stations).  
Place the AM loop antenna as far as possible from  
the TV.  
Noise is heard at high-  
pitched sounds on AM sta- Noise caused by TV set.  
tions.  
Move DTR-7.4 away from TV set.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Guide—Continued  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Noise caused by uorescent lamp being  
Move antenna as far as possible from the uores-  
turned on and off.  
cent lamp.  
Crackling noise on both  
AM and FM stations.  
Install an FM outdoor antenna as far as possible  
from the road (See page 15).  
Noise from automobile ignition.  
Station is too strong.  
Change the position or direction of the outdoor antenna.  
Change to FM indoor antenna (See page 14).  
Stereo indicator lights, but  
sound is distorted and ste-  
reo separation is bad.  
Multiple reection of the radio waves  
because of tall buildings or mountains.  
Use antenna that has better directivity and orient it  
so distortion decreases.  
Station is too weak.  
Install an outdoor FM antenna (See page 15).  
Change the position or direction of the outdoor  
Indicators for stereo recep-  
tion flicker and hiss is  
heard on FM stations.  
Stereo FM broadcasts cover only about  
half the distance of an ordinary broadcast. antenna (See page 15).  
No preset station is  
recalled.  
Memory is lost because power has been  
Store all stations again (See page 49).  
turned off for a long time.  
Improper connection.  
Check connections. Insert the plugs and connec-  
tors completely (See pages 20 to 23).  
Desired picture does not  
appear.  
Video Setup Sub-menu settings are incor- Check settings at Setup Menu Input Setup  
rect.  
Menu Video Setup Sub-menu (See page 38).  
Check connections (See pages 20 to 23).  
Check connections (See pages 20 to 23).  
No OSD Menu display.  
Improper connection.  
Improper connection.  
Audio and video do not  
match.  
Video Setup Sub-menu settings are incor- Check settings at Setup Menu Input Setup  
rect.  
Menu Video Setup Sub-menu (See page 38).  
Audio is not heard or audio  
from different source is  
heard.  
Digital Setup Sub-menu settings are  
incorrect.  
Check settings at Setup Menu Input Setup  
Menu Digital Setup Sub-menu (See page 36).  
TV (or monitor) is not set to receive the  
output signals from the receiver.  
Set the TV (or monitor) to the receiver input.  
No picture appears on the  
TV screen (or monitor).  
Videoconnectioncableisnotconnectedsecurely. Check connections (See pages 20 to 23).  
Input source is connected to the COMPO- Make sure TV (or monitor) is connected to COM-  
NENT VIDEO IN connectors.  
PONENT VIDEO OUT connectors (See page 20).  
Check the connection between this unit and the LAN  
side port of your router (gateway) (See page 73).  
Fails to activate the Inter-  
net radio or music server  
feature.  
Make sure that the modem and router (gateway)  
are correctly connected. Also, make sure that the  
power is on (See page 73).  
Imperfect network connection.  
Make sure that the Network Setup is congured  
properly (See pages 76 to 79).  
Make sure that your system satises all the system  
requirements listed on page 72.  
When you play WAVE les on multiple DTR-7.4,  
the playback sound may discontinue because of net-  
work overload. In this case, deploying another inde-  
pendent LAN dedicated to the NetAudio to separate  
it from the general LAN connection, or adding a  
switching hub or router to improve network trafc  
may resolve the problem.  
Excessive load on the network or server.  
Or processor-intensive applications  
including word processor and spreadsheet  
are running.  
The playback sound dis-  
continues while using the  
Music Server.  
The unit fails to obtain a  
station list from an Inter-  
net radio site (via the XiVA  
internet Radio Service).  
The radio site is now out of service or oth-  
erwise inaccessible due to some other rea- Try to access the site again at a later time.  
son such as maintenance.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Guide—Continued  
Symptoms  
Causes  
The Network Audio Server is not running. Turn on the Network Audio Server  
Create MP3, MWA, and/orWAV audio les on the  
Remedies  
No audio les found on the server.  
Network Audio Server to create the list of audio  
les saved on the server.  
Turn off the power of the DTR-7.4 and turn it on  
again (When the DTR-7.4 is without a power  
switch, unplug the power cord and plug it in again).  
If this does not resolve the problem, turn off the  
power of the Network Audio Server and turn it on  
again.  
Selecting the “Music  
Server” fails to play music  
or fails to connect to the  
server.  
The network is down because of some  
failures.  
The NTSP Port setting on the DTR-7.4  
differs from that of the Network Audio  
Server.  
Go to 5-4. Client Setup Sub-menu,select c.  
NTSP Port,then set the same value as used for  
the Network Audio Server (See page 78).  
The audio le list of the Network Audio  
Server contains no les that have album  
names.  
Search by album returns  
no match.  
Assign album names to the les contained in the  
audio le list of the Network Audio Server.  
The audio le list of the Network Audio  
Server contains no les that have artist  
names.  
Search by artist returns no  
match.  
Assign artist names to the les contained in the  
audio le list of the Network Audio Server.  
The audio le list of the Network Audio  
Server contains no les that have genre  
names.  
Search by genre returns no  
match.  
Assign genre names to the les contained in the  
audio le list of the Network Audio Server.  
You have not yet created any playlists in  
the Network Audio Server.  
No playlist can be selected.  
Create playlists in the Network Audio Server.  
Depending on the models shipping destina-  
The NetAudio information tion, the information on NET AUDIO and  
Set the Component Video setting to VIDEOat  
Input Setup Menu Video Setup Sub-Menu.  
is not displayed.  
Immediate Display may not be displayed  
when the component video signal is output.  
No batteries in remote controller.  
Batteries are dead.  
Insert batteries (See page 7).  
Replace batteries (See page 7).  
Remotecontrollerisnotpointedattheremote Point the remote controller at the remote sensor of  
sensor of the DTR-7.4.  
the DTR-7.4 (See page 7).  
Remote controller is too far from the  
DTR-7.4.  
Operate the remote controller within 16 feet (5  
meters) (See page 7).  
Front panel controls func-  
tion but remote controller  
controls do not.  
To select Amp mode, press the scroll wheel (See  
Remote controller is functioning in a dif- page 12). To select other mode, press the Mode  
ferent mode.  
button, and then roll the scroll wheel to select your  
favorite mode (See page 84).  
If you change the remote controllers transmission  
signal format to RF, be sure to select the same ID  
as the RF receiver.  
The Transmission Signal Format setting  
for the remote controller is wrong.  
LATE NIGHT function  
cannot be used.  
Playback source is not Dolby Digital  
encoded.  
Check that the DOLBY DIGITAL indicator lights  
up on the display (See page 55).  
Re-EQ function cannot be Re-EQ may not be able to be set due to  
used. current listening mode.  
Select different listening mode (See page 55).  
Desired parameter cannot Parameter may not be able to be set due to Check settings in Audio Adjust Menu (See pages  
be set.  
current listening mode.  
57 to 61).  
Set the Multichannel setting to Yesat Setup  
Menu Input Setup Menu Multichannel  
Setup Sub-menu (See page 64).  
The Multichannel setting is set to No.”  
Multichannel audio is not  
output.  
Input source is not connected to MULTI  
CH INPUT port.  
Check connections (See page 64).  
Check connections (See page 66).  
Components are incorrectly connected.  
Components in remote  
zone (Zone 2) do not oper-  
ate properly.  
Objects are interfering with remote con-  
troller signals.  
Move inferring objects away from path of remote  
controller signals.  
Sound is sometimes heard One digital input format has been speci-  
Select Allat Setup Menu Input Setup Menu  
Digital Setup Sub-menu Digital Format  
(See page 37).  
and sometimes not heard  
with digital sources.  
ed so other digital formats are not  
played.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Guide—Continued  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Noise during playback or  
skipping of the beginning  
sounds occurs with DTS  
sources, PCM sources and when different sources are played.  
other digital sources.  
When Allis set for the digital format  
setting, time is required to change formats Menu Input Setup Menu Digital Setup Sub-  
Try specifying the format you are playing at Setup  
menu Digital Format (See page 37).  
The unit cannot be  
switched to Dolby EX or  
DTS-ES mode.  
Change the Hardware Setup Surr Back/Zone 2  
Sub-menu setting to Surr Back (See page 31).  
Surr Back/Zone 2is set to Zone 2.”  
Also refer to the respective instruction manuals of the  
CD player, DVD player, video cassette recorder, TV  
monitor, etc., that comprise your entertainment system.  
The DTR-7.4 contains an internal microcomputer that  
performs high-level operations. However, on extremely  
rare occasions, noise or interference from an external  
source or static electricity may cause faulty operation. If  
this occurs, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet,  
wait ve or more seconds, and then plug it back in. This  
should correct the situation.  
* To reset the surround mode and other settings to the  
factory default settings, hold down the Video 1 button  
with the DTR-7.4 turned on and then press the  
Standby/On button. CLEARappears in the front  
display and the DTR-7.4 enters the standby state.  
If One of the Messages Shown Below  
Appears  
“Not available with headphones use”  
Operation not allowed because headphones are plugged  
into the DTR-7.4.  
“Not available with Multichannel use”  
Operation not allowed while the multichannel output is  
being used.  
“Not available in this Sp Config”  
Will not work with the current speaker conguration  
settings.  
“Not available in Zone 2 mode”  
Setting not allowed because the Zone 2 mode is turned  
on.  
“Only available with Dolby D”  
No setting other than Dolby Digital can be set.  
“Not available in this Listening mode”  
Will not work with the current listening mode.  
“Not available with this signal”  
The listening mode cannot be selected with the current  
input source.  
“Not available in Pure Audio mode”  
Will not work with the Pure Audio mode.  
“Surr Back/Zone 2 setting is Surr Back”  
Operation not allowed because the setting is Surr Back.  
“Surr Back/Zone 2 setting is Zone 2”  
Operation not allowed because the setting is Zone 2.  
“Not available with Muting”  
Operation not allowed because the muting is activated.  
“Zone 2 is not On”  
Will not work because Zone 2 has not been turned on.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specications  
AMPLIFIER SECTION  
TUNER SECTION  
FM  
Tuning range  
USA & Canadian models:  
Power output (USA model) (FTC):  
All channels:  
100 W per channel min. RMS  
into 8 , 2 channels driven from  
20 Hz to 20 kHz with no more  
than 0.08% total harmonic dis-  
tortion.  
130 W min. RMS into 6 ,  
2 channels driven, 1 kHz with no  
more than 0.1% total harmonic  
distortion.  
87.50108.00 MHz (100 kHz  
steps)  
87.50108.00 MHz (50 kHz steps)  
Australian models:  
Usable sensitivity  
Mono:  
11.2 dBf, 1.0 µV (75 , IHF)  
0.9 µV (75 , DIN)  
17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75 , IHF)  
23 µV (75 DIN)  
Stereo:  
50 dB quieting sensitivity  
Mono:  
Stereo:  
Continuous power output  
(Australian model) (DIN):  
Dynamic power output (stereo):2 × 250 W at 3 Ω  
2 × 210 W at 4 Ω  
17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75 )  
37.2 dBf, 20.0 µV (75 )  
2.0 dB  
135 W at 6 Ω  
Capture ratio:  
Image rejection ratio  
USA & Canadian models:  
Australian models:  
IF rejection ratio:  
Signal-to-noise ratio  
Mono:  
2 × 130 W at 8 Ω  
40 dB  
85 dB  
90 dB  
Total Harmonic Distortion:  
IM Distortion:  
0.08% at rated power  
0.08% at 1 W output  
0.08% at rated power  
0.08% at 1 W output  
60 at 8 Ω  
76 dB  
70 dB  
Damping factor:  
Input sensitivity and impedance  
PHONO:  
LINE (CD, TAPE, DVD,  
VIDEO 1-5):  
MULTICHANNEL INPUT  
(FRONT L/C/R, SUR-  
ROUND L/R, SURROUND  
BACK L/R):  
(SUBWOOFER):  
COAXIAL 1, 2, 3 (DIGI-  
Stereo:  
Alternate channel attenuation: Mono 55 dB  
Selectivity:  
AM suppression ratio:  
Total harmonic distortion  
Mono:  
Stereo:  
Frequency response:  
Stereo separation:  
2.5 mV, 50 kΩ  
200 mV, 50 kΩ  
50 dB (DIN)  
50 dB  
0.2%  
0.3%  
30 Hz15 kHz, 1.0 dB  
45 dB at 1 kHz  
30 dB at 100 Hz10 kHz  
200 mV, 50 kΩ  
36 mV, 50 kΩ  
AM  
Tuning range  
TAL):  
0.5 Vp-p, 75 Ω  
DVD, VIDEO 1, 2, 3, 4, 5: 1 Vp-p, 75 (Composite Video)  
1 Vp-p, 75 (S-Video, Y signal)  
0.28 Vp-p, 75 (S-Video, C sig-  
nal)  
USA & Canadian models:  
Australian models:  
Usable sensitivity:  
Image rejection ratio:  
IF rejection ratio:  
Signal-to-noise ratio:  
Total harmonic distortion:  
5301,710 kHz (10 kHz steps)  
5221,611 kHz (9 kHz steps)  
30 µV  
40 dB  
40 dB  
40 dB  
0.7%  
COMPONENT VIDEO 1, 2: 1 Vp-p, 75 (Y)  
0.7 Vp-p, 75 (PB/CB, PR/CR)  
Output level and impedance  
Rec out (TAPE, VIDEO 1,2): 200 mV, 470 Ω  
GENERAL  
Pre out:  
1 V, 470 Ω  
Power supply  
ZONE 2 OUT:  
VIDEO (VIDEO 1, 2, MONI-  
100 mV, 470 Ω  
USA & Canadian models:  
Australian models:  
Power consumption  
USA & Canadian models:  
Australian models:  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
AC 230-240 V, 50 Hz  
TOR OUT, ZONE 2 OUT): 1 Vp-p, 75 (Composite Video)  
S-VIDEO (VIDEO 1, 2,  
8.1 A  
655 W  
MONITOR OUT):  
1 Vp-p, 75 (S-Video, Y signal)  
0.28 Vp-p, 75 (S-Video, C sig-  
nal)  
435 × 175 × 460 mm  
17-1/8" × 6-7/8" × 18-1/8"  
17.4 kg (38.4 lbs)  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT: 1 Vp-p, 75 (Y)  
Weight:  
0.7 Vp-p, 75 (PB/CB, PR/CR)  
Specications and features are subject to change without  
Phono overload:  
120 mV RMS at 1 kHz, 0.5%  
T.H.D.  
notice.  
Frequency response:  
5 Hz to 100 kHz: +1/3 dB (CD in  
Direct mode)  
RIAA deviation:  
Tone Control  
Bass:  
20 Hz to 20 kHz: 0.8 dB  
10 dB at 50 Hz  
Treble:  
10 dB at 20,000 Hz  
Signal-to-noise ratio (direct)  
PHONO:  
Line:  
Ethernet port:  
Supported audio le format:  
80 dB (IHF A, 5 mV input)  
110 dB (IHF A, 0.5 V input)  
10BASE-T  
MP3, WMA, WAV (non-compres-  
sion, sampling rates of 32 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz supported)  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Integra Division of  
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION  
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.  
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www. integrahometheater.com  
Integra Division of  
ONKYO CORPORATION  
Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN  
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8124  
SN 29343586  
D0310-1  
(C) Copyright 2003 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Infinity Speaker System Infinity Compact Powered Subwoofer User Manual
Ingersoll Rand Power Hammer 8248 B User Manual
Invacare Mobility Aid 1026793 User Manual
JVC Camcorder LYT2340 002A M User Manual
JVC Computer Monitor GM V42E User Manual
Kambrook Blender KBL20 User Manual
Kenwood Stereo Amplifier KAC PS810D User Manual
Kenwood Two Way Radio TKR 900 User Manual
Kidde Carbon Monoxide Alarm KN OOSM I User Manual
Kodak Digital Camera C310 CD40 User Manual